Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Fanuc Series 0 MB Fanuc Series 00 MB Operator S Manual
Fanuc Series 0 MB Fanuc Series 00 MB Operator S Manual
.i._ , i-
.t-." I
'i!
'- !
.r '; -':i,.
*1:r+ "-
!'
,' -.!,::'l]i :; -' tr
, ],r'
$** r
..
i i. r'
l.r
'i;
:'
,l I
.'i
.:
'./ '"{,
I. GENEML
I I. PROGRA]4I"IING
I. INTRODUCTION 9
) CONTROLLED AXES 20
I Controlled Axes 20
) 2 IncremenE Svstem ZU
3 Maximum Stroke 20
5. FEED FUNCTIONS 32
5.I Rapid Traverse 32
5.2 Cutting Feed Rate 32
5.2.I Tangential speed constant control 32
5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp 32
5.2.3 Feed per minute (G94) 33
5.2.4 Feed per revolution (c95) 33
5.2.5 One-digit F code feed . ....+ 33
5.3 Override 34
5.3. 1 Feed rate overri-de 34
5.3.2 Rapid traverse override 34
5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration 35
5.4. 1 Automatic acceler ation/deceleration after interpolation . 35
5.5 Speed Control at Corn ers of Blocks 36
5.5.1 Exact stop (G04) 37
5.5.2 Exact stop mode (G61) 37
5.5.3 CutLing mode (c64) 37
5,5.4 Tapping mode (c63) 37
5.5.5 Automatic corner override (G62) 38
5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop (c04) 4I
REFERENCE POINT L?
6.1 Automatic Reference Point Return (G28, G29)
6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28) 42
6.I.2 Automatic return from reference point (C29) 43
6.2 Reference Point Return Check (G27) 43
6.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point Return (G30) 44
7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 45
7.L Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, G54 to G59) 45
7.I.1 Setting work coordinate sysrem (c92) 45
7.1.2 Setting work coordinate system (G54 to cs 9) 47
7.f.3 Selecting work coordinate systern (G54 co G59) 48
7.1.4 Changing work eoordinate system by program command
(csa to csg) 49
7.f.5 Setting and display of work zero point offset amount 50
7 .I.6 Systern variables 5l
7.2 Plane Selection (G17, G18, Gt9) 52
III. OPEMTION
I. INTRODUCTION . 2T7
1 1. DISPLAY 303
I 1. I Program Display JUJ
IL.2 Displaying Program Memory Used 303
11.3 Command Value Display (Function key: PRGRM ) 305
lI.4 Display for Program Check 306
Il.5 Current Position Display (Function key: POS ) . .t. . . . . . 307
11.6 Display of Run Tirne and Parts Count 309
11.6.1 Actual position screen 309
1 I . 6. 2 Parameter setting screen 3 10
Il.7 Alarm Display (Function key: ALARM ) .. 311
If.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Displav 311
tI.9 Clock 3r3
13. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1 /82/FI) 315
13.1 What is a File 3r5
13.2 File Heading 315
13.3 Data Output Operation 3r6
13. 3. I CNC prQran output 3i6
f3.3.2 Offset data output 317
f3.3.3 parameter output
CNC 3r7
13.4 Data Input Operation 3L7
t3.4.1 CNC program input 3r7
13.4.2 Offset data input JId
13.4.3 CNC parameter input 318
13.5 File Deletion 318
L 3. 6 Precautions 318
i3.6.1 Request for cassette replacement 318
13.6.2 Cassette adaptor lamp conditions 319
f3.6.3 Write-protect key 319
13.7 Floppy Cassette Di-rectory Display 320
I3.7. I Display ... 320
13.7.2 File input/output 322
13.7.3 Other precautions 323
2. TROUBLESHOOTING 339
2, LGeneral 339
') 2 Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation,
Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control 339
3 NC System Check (No E.ools required) 34L
4 CNC Status Displav 34L
2.5 Display of Position Deviation
2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point 5+J
V. APPENDIXES
APPENDIX 6 STATUS WI{EN TURNING THE POWER ON, WI{EN RESET 36s
:
il
bt
E
F:i'
fi'l
)
I
i
i
l\
I GENERAL
This manual describes the programming, operation, and daily maintenance for 0-MB
and 00-MB. This manual includes all optional functions. For the functions
unique to each CNC system, see APPENDIX 11 I'LIST 0F SPECIFICATIONS". ,
For which options are provided with your system, see machine tool builder I s
manual.
Sometimes, the specification and usage of the system may be different according
to t.he specification of the rnachine side operation panel.
So, see the machine tool builderts manual without, fail.
1.1 General Flow of Operation of CNC Machine Tool
When machining the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program,
then operate the CNC machine by using the program.
l) First, prepare the prograrn from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine
too1, Then punch the paper tape to be read the program into the CNC system.
How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter II.
PROGRA}frIING.
2) Paper tape is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the workpieces and
tools on the machine, and operate the tools aceording to the programming.
Finally, execute the machining actua11y.
How to operate the CNC system is described in the Chapter III.
OPERATION.
Part drawing
Before the actual programming, make the machining plan for how to machj-ne the
parc.
Machining plan
l. Determination of workpieces machining range
2. Method of mounting workpieces on the nachine tool
3. Machining sequence in every cutting process
4. Cutting tools and cutting conditions
Decide the cutting method in every cutt.ing process
t.
::i,
4':i.
-3-
\-\_ Cutting
I a
L J
process
Cutting ------\
procedure Face cutting Side cutting Hole machining
1. CuEting nethod
: Rough
Semi
Finish
2. Cutting tool
: Tools
3. Cutting conditions
: Feedrate
Cutt ing
Depth
4, Tool path
Face cutting
Prepare the program of the tool path and cutting condition according to the
workpiece figure, for each cutEing.
I
-4-
I'
r:. rl il
1) The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only.on the CNC, but
on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo
system' the CNC, the operatorrs panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe
the function, programming, and operation relating to all connbinations. This
manual generally describes these fron the stand-polnt of the CNC. So, for
details on a particul.ar CNC machlne tool, refer to the manual issued by the
rnachine tool bullder, which should take precedence over this manual.
2) This rnanual addresses as many subjects as posslble. But it would become too
voluminous to point out everything that should not or cannot be done.
Functlons which are not specifically stated as possible are impossible.
3) Notes refer to detailed and speeific items. So, when a irote is encountered,
terms used in it sometimes are not explained. In this case, first skip the
note' then return to it after having read over the manual for details.
-5-
II PROGRAMMING
lr
il
1. INTRODUCTION
Progam
GOIY _;
X-Y-;
Program
G03X -- Y -- R --;
The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs ls called the
interpolation.
Syutbols of the Progratmed commands G01, GO2, ... are called the preparatory
function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
Control unit
X axis
a) Movement along
staight line \n
colY _; /v Tool movement
X-Y-;
j---
,ll -' Y axis
7
t -
b) Movement along
( a) Movement along
arc '\ straight line
G03X R-; t
-Y- b; Mo"urnent along
Note) Thoughthe table rnay be moved without moving the tool in an actual
machine, thJ.s manual assumes that the tool noves with respect to the
workpiece.
-9-
ilil,
Iii
I
'
Table
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed funetion.
3) Part drawing and tool movenent
a) Reference point (fixed position on rnachine)
An NC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Nornally, tool
change and prograurming of absolute zero point as described later are
performed *t this position. This position is called the reference point.
-10-
(
Program Command
Coordinate system
Part drarving lviachine tool
NC
of tool
hlhena workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay
as follows:
Coordinate system
established on the
- lt -
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the NC in accordance
with the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system
on the part drawing, and cut a work piece into a shape on the drawing.
Therefore' in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the
drawing, the two coordinate systems must be set at the same position.
To set the two coordinate systems at the same positlon, simple methods
sha11 be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machlnings.
Some examples are shown below:
i) Using a standard point of the work.
Bring the Eool center to the standard
point. And set the coordinate system
Work standard point specified by NC at this position.
Fixed
distancc
ii
ii) Mountl"ng a workpiece directly against the jig.
Meet the tool center to the reference
point. And set the coordinate system
point specified by CNC at this position.
Jig shall be mounted on the pre-
determined point from the reference
point.
!
tl iii) Mounting a pallet wj-th a workpiece against the jig.
t'
-L2-
c) How to indicate command dimensions for moving the tool Absolute,
incremental commands (See II-8.1)
Coordinate values of comrnand for moving the tool can be indicated by
absolute or incremental designation.
i) Absolute coordinate values
The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero point of the
coordinate system, i.e. to the position of the coordinate values.
Tool
A (1s,60,40)
(1030,20)
i..
e.i
v|,:
*:j; -
30
#
I
/
u$,
,/
__J
_13_
4) Cutting speed Spindle speed functlon (See II-9)
ll
,,1w,:.,*
,p^'%
rool
7//)
i-----(2/
IL --t
Workpiece I
L---
----J
The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut
is called the cutting speed.
As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in
rpm unit.
For example, when a workpiece having a diameter of 100 nn should be machined
at a cutting speed of 80 nrm/nln, the cutting speed in rpm un.it is calculated
to be approx. 250 rprn from N = 1000 V/nD. Therefore, specify the following:
S 250;
Spindle speed co*mand is called spindle speed function.
5) Selection of tool used for various machining Tool Funetion (See II-10)
Tool number
ATC magazine
-L4-
g
F
6) Command for machi.ne operations ----- Miscellaneous function (See II-11)
When machinlng is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle,
and feed coolant. For this purpose, on-off operations of spindle motor and
coolant valve should be controlled.
Spindle rotation
Coolant
onloff
/l
Workpiece
Blobk'
Block
Block
Program Tool movement sequence
Block
I Block I
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The
program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number
for discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number
for discriminating each program is cal1ed the program number
The block and the program have the following configurations.
*-
ft
_ 15 _
*.
a) Block
Block
b) Prograrn
Program number
Block
BIock
Bloc.k
-15-
'r.
Mrin program
-----l Scbpiogrrm#l
I I
I I r ----r
I
-io'oo'
-- )-|
I
M98Pl@1
I
I
I
--j==-." '/"i I
I
Program for hole #l
I
-/ --
I
M98P1001 Subprogram #2
I
I
-- ---l- or ooz ----"1
I
Lryg_ _ ____J
Hob *1 Hole #l
\
'\c
Hole #2
o
Hole #2
Standard tool
-t
I
J
-t7-
Therefore, a standard tool is selected, anci the difference between the
position of the nose of the standard tool and the position of the nose of
eaeh tool used is measured in advance. B,v setting the rneasrrred value in
the NC (data display and setting: see III-11), rnachining can be performed
without alterjng the program even whcn the tool is changed.
. This function is ca1led the tc'o]. length conpensation.
b) Machining rrsJng the side of cutter Cutter radius compensation (See
rr-14)
Because a cutter has a radlrrs, the cente!- of the cutter path goes around
the workpiece vrith the cutter radius deviated.
Cutter
If raditrs of cutters are stored in menory, the tool can be uroved by cutter
radius apart from the machining part figure. Thls function is ca1led
cutter radius compensation.
-18-
9) Tool movement range ----- Stroke check
An area whieh the tool cannot enter can be specified by parameters. This
functlon is called the stroke check.
I Tutte
l--- ____r
r__
I
L_---l L- .t'
tl
tTr' -
-Jl
7/////U//////////Z///////t Rererencepoint
2 7
l,al,
4V
2',, .- -t-i
'44
t, ',
L
- ---{
:l I
1
//rl-z7zzzrlzzzzrlz,.zzrzrrr2,
*V
LJ
LJ
-19-
2. CONTROLLED AXES
Combined use of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are
functions that cannot be used between axes with different unit systems (circular
interpolation, cutter radius compensati.on, etc.)
For the incremen! system, see the machine tool builder's manual.
2.3 Maximum Stroke
-20-
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTTON)
A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the con-
cerned block.
c enl,Ps Are divi ded into the rurruwrug
u Lvsev
F^1 1^,'i6ft Lwo tsr
Fr'^ Lypes.
- I Y" Meaning
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the same
srolrD is sneeified.
(Example)
GOl and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
{:t I I x
t
7_.
ut GOl is effective in this range
Y-. t
-.
uvvL t
The following G codes are offered.
G20 T**,,f
rrrPuL i-
r!l .'-^L
flruLr
06
r\) 1
Input in mm
-2r-
i:.i ,
i/ il'
llllj a
ll,.lt Function
G code Group
illit,,
iil G31 00 Skip function
,lii,
r,j.rlti
c33 0l Thread cutting
i
G39 00 Corner offset circular interpolation
ii.,i'
iil G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G4i 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 cutter comPensation right
G43 Tool length compensation * direction
G44 08 Tool length compensation - direetion
c49 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
l1
G51 S caling
Gf1+ Work coordinate svstem I selection
*tat* -.*
c65 00 Macro call, Ilacro comman-d-
GOO --*
F1acro modal call
la
\ LL
l'lacro modal cal l cancel
- LZ -
G code uruuP Func t i on
G73 !Porb
svA Arillino
ur rrrrrrS nrrnla
L)Lrc
GB4 T-*^;'--
rdyPf ^.,^1^
116 Ly Lrs
Gvd
\ Return to initial point in canned cycle
l0
G99 Return to R point in canned cycLe
(Note l) G codes marked \ are initial G codes when turning power on.
For G20 and G2l, the G code before turning power off remains. G00 or
G0l can be selected by parameter setting.
(Note 2) uT LUUEJ
-^A^- ^ F E;rUUy
UI ftr^rrn OO aro nnl- mnd: I . Therr
rlrsJ ara only effective in the
ere
block in which they are specified.
(Note 3 ) If a G code not listed on the table of G codes is i--..ts+^r
tLIPULLEUT v! utru ional
-23-
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Starting point
P
/
A----'-
/
/ Non linear interpolation positionjng
/
o+------J
g-.
Eno potnt
(Note 1) The rapid traverse rate in the G00 coumand is set for each axis
independently by the machine tool builder (parameter No. 0518 to No.
0521). Accordingly, the rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the
address F.
In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the
end of a b1ock. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming
the in-position. (See Note 2).
(Note 2)'rln-position" means that the feed motor is withln the specified range.
(This range is determined by the roachine tool builder) (Parameter No.
0500 to No. 0503).
-24-
4.2 Single Direction Positioning (G60)
For accurate positioning without backlash, final positioning .from only one
direction is available.
(Direction for final
Start point O+_--__J positioning is right
End point to left).
G60 is used insEed of G00 as below.
G60o B _\_6_;
An overrin-and--a pos-itionii[direction are set by the parameteT (No. 204 - 2O7z
P0STNI - 4, No. 29: G60X, Y, Z, 4). Even when a commanded positioning direction
coincides with that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end
point. (s, B, y, 6 = X, Y, Z or which one of additional axis A, B, C, U, V, W.
Simultaneous 3 axis is option. )
Overrun
-25-
4.3 Linear Interpolation (G01)
GOl P F;
This comiland i-ctuates the linear interpolation mode. The values of lP define
the distance of tool travel which will be conducted in absolute or incremental
mode, according to the current status of G90/G91. The feed rate is set to a
cutting feed speed commanded by F code and is a modal data.
(Program example)
(c91) GOl x200. 0 YI00. 0 F200. 0 ;
Y axis
t 00.0
X lxis
(Start point) 200.0
The feed rate conmanded by the F code is ueasured along the tool path. If ir is
not coruranded, the feed rate is regarded as zero.
(Note 1) The feed rate of, each axis directlon is as follows.
Gole o B
B
Feed rate of q axis direction: Fc = * . t
Feed direction: FB = f
rate of B axis . t
Feed rate of y axis direction: Fy =
f ' f
Feed rate of E axis direction: Fe =
* ' t
y=ffi
(Note 2) The feed rate of the roa"r, axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min
(the unit is decimal point position)
G9l cOi B-90. 0 F300. :
(Start point)
-26-
:
i,
End point G90 mode Two of the X, End point position in the work
position Y, and Z axes coordinate system
G91 mode Two of the X, Distance from start ooint to end
Y, and Z axes point 4
4 Distance from start Tvro of the I, The signed distance from start
point to center J, and K axes point to center
Arc radius R Arc radius
5 Feed rate F Velocity along arc
The view is from the positive direction of the Z axis (Y axis or X axis) to the
negative direction on XY plane (ZX plane or \Z plane) in the right hand
Cartesian coordinate system.
1
ir.
I \\ \
"o' \\co3
G02\
lcor\ \
----\
I G17
-27-
The end point of an arc ls specified by address X, Y or Z, and is expressed as
an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental
value, the coordinate of the end point which is viewed from the start point of
the arc is specifled. The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for
the X, Y, and Z axes, respeetively. The numerical value following I, J, or K,
however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start
point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and
G9 I, as shor,rn below.
xl z1
| lt t_
I
Y
nnin t tart nni 11i
Start point
j
Center I Center j
I-
-_--l
Programming for circular interpolation
r=50mm
End point
\-..._
--/
-28-
i!.il!,1:
: j ir'r.1; I
l:i,,,,";. 'i. '
' l, l,t:-t1,
(Program examPles)
Y axis
00
60
40
p'
X axis
0 90 r20 140 200
c18 ,G02
'c03'
\ rR
tI }Y t
.G02.
cl9 tco: ,R-
tJ- lv
J
-
-29-
The command method is to simply add a move command axis which is not circular
interpolation axes.
An F command specifies a feed rate along a circular arc. Thereforc - the feed
t !rr\
rate of the linear axis is as follows:
Tool path
-30-
4.6 Equal Lead Thread Cutting (G33)
Feed speed of llnear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02, G03)
are conmanded with numbers after the F code.
5.2.1 Tangential speed constant control
In cutting feed' it is controlled so that speed of the tarrgential dlrectlon is
always the same commanded speed.
Starting point
*--
\ \E-
\ rr
End point
/t\
/', \l
/ 'xl l\at-
|
./ L_J
Fx
For arc
h
F
-32-
5.2.3 Feed per minute (G94)
With the per minute feed mode G94, tool feed rate per minute is directlv
commanded bv numerical value after F.
(Note) When the rotation speed of the position coder is I rpm or less, the feed
rate becomes nonunif orm.
In cases where rnachining is not adversely affected by feed rate
nonuniformity, the position coder can be used at I rpm or less.
Though the degree of nonuniformity differs according to the case, the
degree becomes large as the rotation speed becomes low under I rpm.
5.2.5 One-digit F code feed
Specifying a one-digit number (1 to 9) following F produces a feed rate set
correspondingly to that number. The feed rate is set in advance as a parameter
for each number. F0 produces rapid traverse speed.
Rotating the manual pulse generator with the F l-digit feed rate change switch
on the machine operatorfs panel ON, increases or decreases the feed rate for the
currently selected number.
The increase or decrease of feed rate AF = -Fmax i per scale of manual pulse
I UUX
generat,or,
where, Fmax l: feed rate upper limit for Fl-F4 (parameter setEing No. 583)
Fmax2: feed rate upper limit for F5-F9 (parameter setting No. 584)
X:any value of l-127 (parameter setting No. 216)
-33-
The feed rate set or altered is kept even while the power 1S off. The current
feed rate is displayed on the CRT.
When plural manual pulse generators are available, use the Ist manual pulse
generator without fail.
Format of G94 and G95 is shown below.
5.3 Override
Refer to machine tool builderfs manual for detai,ls of overrides.
a
5.3.1 Feed rate override
The per minute feed (G94) can be overridden using the switch on the machine
operatorrs panel by:
0 to 1502 (per every IO7") .
Feed rate override cannot. be applied to functions in which overrj-de 1s . in-
hibited.
5.3.2 Rapid traverse override
Rapid traverse rate can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs
panel by:
!'0, 25 , 50, 1002.
F0: A constant speed set by parameter (data No. 0533)
:
!
r
-34-
5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
Servo motor
Pulse distribution
(Interpoiation)
Acceleration
/deceleration
con!rol
Rapid traverse
F'
- Rapid traverse
RMAX.
T
-R Accelerat ion,/
deceleration time
constant
(data No. 0522 to
0s 2s)
t* -l t*"
-35-
JOG feed
Jog feed rate r
l
a
I
'J' Jog feed time constant :
'/ X Programmedpath
If the decele.ration command is j-nserted, the actual tool path matches the pro-
grarnmed path. The faster the feed rate and the larger the acceleration/
decereration tiine constant, the larger the error at the corner.
In circular lnterpolation, the actual arc radius is smaller than that of the
prograuuned arc. (See the Appendix. 3) This error can be mininized by rnaking
the acceleration/deceleration time constant of feed rate sma11.
-36-
(Note I) The following chart shows feed rate changes between blocks of
information specifying different types of movement.
Prev ious
-----_r_...--. block
New -------\ Posi t ioning Feed Not moving
block
Posi t ioning x x
Feed x o x
Not moving x
-38-
t'lhen 0 5 0p, the corner is regarded as inside.
0p value is set by parameter (No. 0215) (2S0pSl78 unir.)
rf I is almost, equal to gp, the decision may include an error wirhln
0.001".
b) Motion area
When a corner is judged as inside, the feedrate is overridden from the
distance range within Le of the block on this side from the intersect.j-on
of the corner to the distance range within Ls of the next block from the
intersection of the corner. Distances Ls and Le are linear distances
from a point on the cutter center path to the intersection of the
corner. Le and Ls are set by parameters (No. 0580 and 0581), respective-
ly.
hogrammed path
.-4:
.,,rrA, uviltcr L -a/ \-
Lurlsr ^ohro? -.rh
plrL - \- - f
-
Programnred path
-39-
(ExarnpIe) In case of disc
/'/"/a,i\
| '/ ",r.'l'r,
\,V
|
\v
\h
'/ ./ L,l
/"
I Progranrnrerd path
(Note 1) G64 functions when povrer is turned on or under the clear condition.
(Note 2) Specify G09, if you want to check the exact stop in G62 mode.
(Note 3) The internal circular cutt.ing feedrate change described in (2) 1e
always effective without being affected by these G codes.
-40-
* ;tt'
t.
I,
i
ts
b
i,
I
ogrammed path
With the G04 cornmand, shifting to the next block can be delayed.
Shifting to the next block can be delaved for the commanded minutes.
Format
Per second dwe11
p
c94c04 {:.
A
t
-41 -
6. REFERENCE POINT
The reference point is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can
easily be moved by the reference point return function.
Y
I
o
Re ference poin
-42-
6.1.2 Automatic return from reference point (G29)
G29P _;
This command positions the tool at the cornmanded position via the intermediate
point of a conunanded axj-s . In general, it is commanded immediately following
in" cz8 ccmmand or G30.
For incremental programming, the cornmand value specifies the incremental value
from the intermediate Point.
In the G29 block operation, all commanded axes are positioned at thg inter-
mediate point defined by the previous G2B or G30 corunand, and then to the
commanded point from the intermediate point at the rapld traverse speed.
Application example of G28 and G29
Reference poinl
Tool is changed
ai R point.
Intermediate point
X (rnm)
0 300 I 300 r 800
(c91)
G28X1300.0Y700.0; (Program A to B)
Ttltl.
G29X1800.0Y300.0; (Program B to C)
As shov,rn in the example, the prograuuer is not required to calculate the actual
nove distance from the intermediate point to the reference point.
(Note l) llhen the work coordinate system is changed after the tool reaches the
reference point through the intermediate point by the G28 or G30 com-
mandr'the intermediate point also shifts to a ner^r coordinate system.
{ If G29 is then commanded, the tool moves to the commanded position
through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the new coor-
Si dinate system.
s
g 6.2 Reference Point Return Check (GZ7l
S.
A reference point is fixed on the rnachine tool and the cutter can be moved to
t
that point by the reference point return function.
s The G27 reference point return check functlon checks whether or not the program
returns to the reference point normal1y, as programmed.
G27lF :
This comnnnd-positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the
reference point, the reference point return lamp lights up and the next block is
executed. However, if the position reached by the tool is not the reference
Point, an alarm is displayed.
-43-
(uote t) In an offset mode, the position to be reached by the tool with the G27
cornmand is the posiEion obtained by adding the offset va1ue.
Therefore, if the position with the offset value added is not the
reference point, the lamp does not light up, but an ararm is displayed
instead. Usually, cancel offsets before G27 is commanded.
(Note 2) when the machine tool system is an inch system wit.h metric input, the
reference poinr return lamp may also light up even if the programmed
position is shifted from the reference point by lp. This is because
the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than
its least command increment.
(Note 3) If G27 is commanded with machine lock on, the reference point return
check is not done.
6.3 2nd,3rd,4th Reference Point Return (G30)
(P2\
II
c30 {P3)
tl - _-t
lP4.r
P2, P4: Selection of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point
If omitted, the 2nd reference point is selected.
This com-and returns the commanded axis to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point
automatically through the specified position. Each reference point return LED
lights after completion of the return.
The positions of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point are determined by
presetting the distance from the reference point as a pararDeter (Dat.a No. 0735
to No. 0738, No. 0780 to,A787) during field adjustment. This funcrion can be
used after the first reference point return has been completed. This function
is the same as G28 reference point return, except that this function returns the
tool to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point instead of the primary reference
point.
If G29 1s commanded imrnediately following G30, the tool is positioned to the
point commanded by G29 through the intermediate point commanded by G30. This
motion is the same as thac by the G29 command following the G28 command.
The G30 command is generally used when the automatic tool changer (ATC) position
differs from the reference point.
(Note I) At least one manual reference point return or automatic reference point
return must be performed by the G28 command after the power supply is
turned on, prior to issuing G30 command.
(Note 2) Like the G2B command, cancel the cutter compensation, and tool length
offset before thi-s command is executed.
-44-
7, COORDINATE SYSTEM
the position to be reached by the tool is taught, the CNC moves the tool to
I^lhen
that position. The position to be reached by the tool is given as'a coordinate
value in a coordinate system.
The position to be reached by the tool id commanded with a coordinate value of
one of the coordi-nate systems, as required. The coordinate value consi-sts of
one component for each program axis.
If there are t.hree program axes (X, Y, and Z), the coordinate value is expressed
as follows:
I 40.0 -
x
Since the number of program axes, that is, the number of components for the
coordinate value, varies with the machine tools, the coordinate value is
referred to as IP in this manual.
7.1 Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, GS4-G59)
A coordinate system used for work machining is called the work coordinate
system. The work coordinate system is set by either of the following method:
l) Using G92 command.
2) Using G54 ro G59 command.
In case of 1),'a work coordinate system is established by specifying coordinate
values after G92.
In case of 2), six work coordinate systems are preset from CRT/MDI panel as
setting data and any of them can be selected by G54 to G59 command.
7.1.'l Setting work coordinate system - Method by G92
1) Establishing coordinate system
G92]p
Thi;-;*","nd-Lstablishes rhe work coordinare sysrem so that a certain point.
of the tool, for example the tool tip, becomes Ip in the established work
coordinate system.
A.y subsequent absolute commands use the DosiEion in Ehis work coordinaEe
system.
-45-
(Exarnple 1)
Meet the programming
start point with the tool
tip and command G92 at
the start of program.
c92X25.2223.0;
(Exanple 2)
As shovrn above, G92 is also used to align the base point of the tool holder with
the start poinf and to establish a coordinate system at the beginning of the
program. If an absolute command is issued, the base point moves to the com-
manded position. In order to move the tool tip to the comrnanded position, the
difference from the tool tip to the base point is compensated by tool length
offset.
(Note 1) If a coordinaie system is set with the G92 comrnand in offset mode, the
coordinate system is set so that. the position before tool length
compensation is applied becomes that specified by G92.
(Note 2) In the cutter radius compensation, offset is temporarily cancelled by a
G92 command.
-46-
' 'lj:.:i
+,#.;
j.;
EOF54
Work coordinate
system 5
Work coordinate
system 6
re -47-
2) Shifting work coordinate svstem
Six work coordinate systems can be shifted bY a specified value (external
work zero point offset value).
Work coordinate
system 5
ZOFS 5
I'XOFS
-48-
, , . rr=:,;f;_;
. i:!;'.
I :.;
,,1.
Example: G55G00X20.02100. 0;
x 40.0220.0;
In the above example, positioning is made to positions ({=20.0, Z=100.0) and
({=40.0e Z=20.0) in work coordinate sysrem 2.
Where the tool is positi.oned on the machine depends on work ,"ro poirrt offset
values.
Work eoordinate
Work coordinate
Work coordinate systemlto6are
System I
System 2 established after
4 0.0 --l ( 40.0 , 20.0 ) reference point
--1-- return after Ehe
20.0 --1(20.o,loo.o) po!r'er. is turned on.
z
20.0 I 00.0
Z When the power is
turned onr G54
coordinate system
Machine zero point is selected.
100 200
i{hen creating a new work coordinate system with the G92 command, a certain point
of the tool becomes a certain coordinate value; therefore, the new work
coordinate system can be determined irrespective of the old work coordinate
system. If the G92 command is used to determine a start point for machining
based on workpieces, a nerd coordinate system can be created even if there is an
error in the old work coordinate system. If the relative relationship among the
G54 to G59 work coordinate systems are correctly set at the beginni-ng, all work
coordinate systems become new coordinate systems as desired.
-49-
I 2000
G54 work
coordinate
system
G55 rvork
coordinate
s),stem
z'
t
f\
-50-
c) The work zero point offset amount is displayed on two pages: press
k"y, and select a required page. "PAGE',
lsr.srll,,*-1 tr*.ln
The following is displayed on each page.
i) Page t
00: Shift amount of work coordj.nate system
01: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system I (c54)
02: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 2 (G55)
03: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 3 (C56)
'.\
11/ Eage I
04: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate sistem i (c57)
05: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system 2 (c58)
06: Work zero point offset amount of work coord.inate system 3 (c59)
2) Set t ing
a) Adjust the cursor to the number to be changed or set.
Step I
Cursor
Press [Tl E. A continuous push on this key moves -the cursor. Move the
cursor over the Pa8e, and the screen will be changed to the screen on the
next Page.
Step 2
Key inl No. IINUMBER ll mTur-l
b) T:y in.E: l-y .l,.[ z I or [E_l
(Note l) rhe workEoordiiii'tE system amount can be entere within the
range of 0 - +7.999 mmor0 - +0. 7999 inch.
7.1.6 System variables
It is possible to know the offsec amount by reading the value of system
ables tt2500 to ll2806 for rhe work offser amount, and vari-
it is also
modify the offset amount by substituting a value for system variable possible to
/ll.
- 51 -
Work offset No. Work offset amount
c59 ll27 06
-52-
, ' :,t,::-
,:i#;!ri
There are t\,to ways to corunand travels of the axes; the absolute command, and the
incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point
is programmed; in the incremental conunand, move distance of the axis itself is
programmed. , G90 and G91 are used to couunand absolute or incremental command,
respectively.
G90: Absolute comrnand
G9l : Incremental cormand
100.0
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordi-
nate system at the beginning of the program. The unit systems of the following
itens can be changed with G codes:
(l) Feedrate comrnanded by F code
(2) Positional command
(3) Offset value
(4) Unit of scale for manual pulse generaEor
(5) Ilovement distance in step feed
(6) Some parameters
(Note l) I^Ihen the power is turned oo, the NC status is the same as that held
before the power r{as turned off.
(Note 2) GzO and G2l must not be swltched during a program.
(Note 3) When the machine unit and the input unit systems are different, the
maxlmum error is half of the least command increment. This error is
not accumulated.
(Note 4) When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (c2l) and vice versa,
the offset value must be reset according to the input unit.
I
-53-
8.3 Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type Decimal Point Programming
This control can input numerical values with a decimal point. However, some
addresses cannot use a decimal point. A decimal point may be used with rnm,
inches or second values. The location of decimal point is mm, inch or second.
ZL5.O 215 millimeters or Zl5 inches.
F10.0 10 uun/min. or l0 inch/min.
G04X1 . D,rell for one second
The following addresses can be used with a decj-mal point iXrYrZrIrJrKrQ,
R, 4-th, F.
Use a parameter to select input method; whether to input by pocket calculator
type input, or by the former type decirnal point input.
(Example )
Program
Pocket calculator type Former type decimal
command
decimal point input point input
xl 000 1 000 mm lmm
xl 000. 1 000 nm 1000 nm
(I{ote i) In the dwell comrLand, decimal point can be used wj-th address X but not
with address P. (This is because P is also used for a sequence
number. )
(Note 2) The appropriate G code should be specified before the numerical values
are specified {n one block.
l) G20; (inch dimension)
Xl.0G04;....... Because the value Xt.0 is not regarded as the
number of seconds, buE the distance of motion (in
inches), Xl0000G04 is assumed resulting in dwelling
for f0 seconds. Indication also changes from 1.0
to 10.0 when G04 is input.
G04Xt.0 .. This is regarded as G04X1000 and dwell is performed
tor a seconcl .
(Note 3) There is a great difference in values with and without the decimal
point, when programned by conventional decimal point progra'nming.
G2L ; (rniillmeter dimensions)
]ll. ,!L mm
..I X0.001 mn
G20; (inch dimension s)
xt. Xl inch
X0.0001 inch
(Note 4) Values with and without a decimal point can be specified together.
Xl000223.7;
X10.Y22359;
(Note 5) Valuef less than the least input increment are rounded off.
When XL.23456 is specified, XI.234 is assumed in rnillimeter input and
XL.2345 is assumed in inch inpuE.
Also, the number of digits must not exceed the ma:<imum number of digits
a1lowed.
XL.23456789 This is an error because it exceeds B digits.
XL.2345678 ... This is not an error because it is within 8 disits.
- Jq -
$-.o" ,
':iit;'i'1ffi'
li*i'
t,_
(Note 6) When a number ryith a decimal point has been input, the number is con-
verted into an integer of the least input increment.
Example:
XI2.34 X123400 (input in inches)
This converted integer is checked for its number of digits.
Example:
x123456.7 Xl23456700 (input in inch)
An alarm occurs because the converted integer exceeds 8 digits.
-
-55-
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
-56-
j
a-
,-.;.*lr
Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency
of use) for each group being specified. The function of accumulating the tool
life of each group in use and selecting and using che next tool previously
sequenced in the same group, is called the tool life management function.
P___LAAAA;
o"." for the next group
TAAAAH00D ]
-57 -
The setting operation is as follows.
(i) Insert the aborze tape into the tape
(iii) TAPE mode
reader and load the tape in the EDIT
mode, as wj.th an ordinary CNC tape.
The program will be registered in
the part program memory and will be
made ready for display and editing.
Part Program
storage &
(ii) Perform a cycle srarr operation in
editine area the AUTO mode to run the program.
The data will be stored in the tool
(ij) AUTO life data area of the memory; at the
mode same time, the already existing tool
life data of all groups will be
Presetting cancelled and the life counters will
Display
be cleared. Data once stored is not
Tool life data area erased by turning the power off.
(iii) Executing a cycle start operation in
the TAPE mode instead of rhe
operation of (i), stores the program
contents directly from the tape onto
the tool life data area. In this
case, however, display and editing
cannot be done as i_n (i).
(Note) TAPE mode is not always prepared according to the machine tool builders
in 0 series.
(Note l) Whether tool life is to be indicated by time (minutes) or by frequency,
it is set by a parameter. (No. 0039-LCTH)
(tlote 2) Tool nurnber is up to 4 digits.
(Note 3) D and H codes are up to 254,
L 32 8
J 64 L
4 128 2
(Note 4) The number of groups and the number of tools per group Ehat can be
registered are combined by setting in one of four ways as follows:
In any combination, up to 256 tools can be registered. Combination i
is selected for up to 16 gruops, each with up to 16 toolsl combination
2 for.up to 32 groups, each wit.h up to 8 tools; and the tike. To
change a combination, change the parameter, then reset the tool groups.
If the tool groups are not reset, former tool groups are selected.
Therefore after changing parameter, execute the group setting program
^ ^^.i *
dXdllt.
(tlote 5) CJaes H and D, when not in use, can be omitted.
(Note 6) The same tool No. can appear at any frequency and at any place in the
set data.
-58-
The following is a concrete example of the tape format.
0000i ;
GlOL3 ;
P001L0150;
T001 lH02Dl3 ;
Data of group I
T0132H05D08;
T0068H14D16;
P002L1400 ;
T0061H15D07 ;
T024LH25D04 ; Data of group 2
T0134H17D03;
T0074H08D21;
P003L0700 ;
T0012H14D08; Data of group 3
T0202H22DO2 ;
Gll
M02
_ _59 _
(Note l) From T0000 to TAAAA, stipulated by the tool life management ignore No.
AAAA, are handled as ordinary T code commands, and no tool life
management is Performed. When the T code of AAAA plus the group No. is
designated, tool life management is executed for the related group.
The value of the tool life management ignore No. is set by a parameter.
When the value is 100, for example, from T0000 to T0I00 are output as
ordinary T codes; and when the T0t0l is designated, a T code of a tool,
which has not reached its life end among the tools of group 1, is
output.
(Note 2) The above tape format uses the tool return No. command method (Type A),
which requires a tool return command at the time of tool change. Type
B and Tvpe C are also available.
Concrete examples of the tape fomat when the tool life management ignore No. is
100 are described on each type.
Tvoe A
Format lleaning
G43H99:
l'
Uses the tool length compensation value of the
I tool of group 03.
I
I
Cutter comDensation cancel.
t .'
unn. Tool length compensation cancel.
-60-
TyPe B
Format Meaning
Tl0l
I
; Set the tool of group 0l to the waiting posit,ion.
I
9rv
T
t CuEter compensation cancel.
I
H00;
I
Tool length compensation cancel.
I
M06T104; Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle.
Load the tool of group 02 to the magazine.
Bring the tool of group 04 to the waiting
posit 1on.
Machining using the tool of group 03.
-61 -
Type C
Format Meaning
I
I
Machinign using the tool of group 01.
I
M06T103:
l'
Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle.
I Load the tool of group 0l to the magazine.
I
I Load the Eool of group 03 to the wait.ing
I
I
pos it ion.
I
I
Machining usign the tool of group 02.
I
(Note l) Whether T code following M06 is used as back number or as waiting code
for next exchange is set by the parameter (No. 0039-I'16TCD).
2) Counting tool life
Tool life is counted by time or by frequency. The life count is executed
every group and the contents of life counter is not cleared by turning off
Po\^/er.
a) tool life is specified by time (minutes)
When
In this case, a T code in the machining program specifies tool life
management group and the time during which the tool is used in the cutting
mode from the M06 specification to the next M06 specification is countec
at certain intervals (four seconds). The time for single block stop, feed
hold, rapid traverse, dwell, machine lock, time to wait for FIN signal
etc., is disregarded.
(Note 1) The tool life can be set up to max of 4300 min.
b) When tool life is specified by frequency
The couriter for groups of tools that were used is increased by one, every
process from the time that a cycle start operation is performed until the
time that M02 or M30 is commanded and the CNC is reset. Even if the
eonmand for the same group is given a number of times in one process, the
counter increase stays at one.
(Note l) I^lhen having executed M02 or 1130 with life specified by the frequency of
use, input the External Reset (ERS) signal to the CNC.
(Note 2) l"lax. f requency of the tool lif e i-s 9999 .
-62-
r.,1ri:,; ::;i
r*':
when a move command and M or B codes are specified in the same block, the com-
mands are executed in one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and M or B function commands.
ii) Executing M and B function commands upon completion of move command
execut ion,
(Example) Nl G0l c91X50.0Y-50.0 M05; (Spindte srop)
L\ tl
F s0 ---l
The spindle stops at
the end of move
command execution.
(i)
Sequence (i) Sequence (ii)
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specifi-
cation. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
11.1 Miscellaneous Function (M Function)
Itlhen a 3-digit f igure is specif ied f ollowing address M, a 3-digir BCD code
signal and a strobe signal are transnitted. These signals .ru ,rs.d for 9N/OFF
control of a rnachine function. One M code can be specified in one block.
Selection of M codes for functions varies with the rnachine tool builder.
The following M codes indicate special meaning. t
1) M02, M30: End of program
i) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary fnr rooi qfrr-
tion of NC commands from tape to memory.
ii) cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with
the machine tool builder. )
iii) The NC tape is turned to the beginning of the program.
2) t"tOO: Program stop
Cyc1e operatj,on is stopped after a block containing !100 is executed. When
the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as
in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by actlatlng
the cNC. (This differs wirh rhe machine tool builder.)
3) M0t: Optional stop
simi lrrlrr tn |r{QQ, cycle operation is stopped after a block containins M0 I is
executed- This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the
machi-ne control panel has been pressed.
4) MgA: Calling of subprogram
This code is used to call a subprogram. See section 12.4.1 (2) for details.
5) M99: End of subprogram
This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution returns control
tne ..^-:-.
LO +!'a
fn
mal-n -Program. See the subprogram control section for details. (Sec-
tion 12.4.r (2))
(Note l) The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read inro rhe inpur
buffer register, if present. Similarly, t\ro M codes which do not
buffer the next block can be set by parameters (No.0lll, 0l12). Refer
Eo the machi-ne tool builderts instruction manual for these M codes.
- 63 -
(Note 2) The code and strobe signals are not sent to the machine tool- side for
the M98, M99.
(Note 3) Except for M98, M99, all M codes are processed by 'the nachine too1, but
they are not done by the CNC side. Refer to the machine tool builder's
instruction manual for details.
11.2 Auxiliary Functions
Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 3-digit or
5-digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding indexing
differs between machlne tool bullders.
-64-
$
ltr
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
t.
A program is composed of the following sections:
-- (i) TaPe Start
il.
(ii) Leader
(i11) Program Start
(iv) Program Section
(v) Comment
(vi) Program End
(vii) Tape End
Program - I Comment
Section I
(if necessary)
hogIam Start
(Note 1) lI02 can be used instead of M30 at the end of the maln progran.
(Note 2) Wtren in IS0 code, LF is used for ;, while in EIA code, CR is used.
2) One subprogram on a tape
Program
Section
ffi -L -L-l
Tape End
A subprogram must be used after being entered into the part program memory
area.
:
a
L
:.
:r.-:il
"'ii*
. -, r.Jlit-fJ;,
-55- ,+ $p,iil
3) one main progran and a number of subprograms on a taDe
Main Program
(if necessary, insert aJ6frrnent
sectlon in the proper section.)
Program Start
Subprogram
ubprogram End
Tape End
Program Section
+- Comn:ent
Tape Start Program Start
Program Section
Program Section
-66-
Program
Section
Tape End
Program End
A program number must be put at the first block of each main program section
or subprogram section.
A prograur number is a four-digit number following address 0. (lrlhen in ISO,:
can be also used instead of O. )
Program numbers are not necessarily given. See Secti"on 12. 4'.2 f or details.
0r001c0Ixr2 300.
g-
Prog:am
Number
Information punched before the first LF (for IS0 code) or CR (for EIA code) on a
paper tape is called the Leader Section. Normally, the CNC is set to the Label
Skip condition when turning the power on or resetting and this section of paper
tape is loaded on a PPR. The PPR reads but skips this section (by the Label
Skip function). Generally, a labe1 for a tape is punched in this section.
Since no parity check is performed on the skipped leader section, any combina-
tion of codes other than LF and cR may be punched in this section.
(Note) The 1abe1 skip function is used to ignore all information up to the first
EOB code.
Punching the following code immediately after the end of the Leader section (at
the top of the first block of a program) indicates the start of a program. This
code is necessary to release the LabeL skip function.
-61 -
12.4 Program Section
The part of the paPer tape punched between the Program Start and program End
code (except the Cortment section explained in Section 12.5) is called the
Program Section. Information specifying tool travel and machine ON/6FF function
is punched in this section. This section is cal1ed the significant section and
is different from the non-si-gnificant section which includes the Leader and
Conrment Section.
A program section is composed of a number of blocks. A block is partitioned
into a number of words, and the end of a block is identified by an End of Block
Code (LF in ISO code and CR in EIA code).
l-- u,""u
j
(Note 1) TV check (vertical parity check)
A parity check is performed in the vertical direction of a b1ock, and
alarm 002 is generated if the block is found to contain an odd number
of characters (between a code j-rnmediately following an EOB and the next
EOB). The TV check is not performed for a part of tape which is read
but skipped by the Label Skip function, but the Command Section between
rr (f
' and tr) I' ig checked f or the total number of characters in each
block. The TV check function can be specified Valid/Invalid through
the IIDI keyboard. (See Section Il.3 in Chaprer III.)
(tlote Z) In program examples in this manual,; is used instead of the End of
Block code (LF for IS0 and CR for EIA), but the proper EOB code LF
(IS0) or CR (EIA) must be used in actual programming.
12.4.1 Main program and sub program
1) Main program
A program is divided into a main program and subprogram: Norma1ly, the NC
operates according to the main program, but when a comnand calling a
subprogram is encountered in the main program, control is passed to the
subprogram. When a corunand indicating to return to the main prograp is
encountered in the subprogram, control is returned to the main program.
-68-
F'
$t
Main program Subprogam
Information I Information 1
Information 2 Information 2
'Fg[o.w m rnrormaRon
tn lne sll rDfOqfam--
Information n
lnfolmation n + I
A total of 125 main programs and subprograms may be stored in the NC nemory,
and the CNC uses one of these main programs to move the CNC machine tool.
cNc
Program
#r a>
/
.7 @ I
#n2
Program
a
Refer to III 9. 2 for how to register programs.
E<'
tu -69-
?l Subprograms
When a program contains certain fixed sequences or frequently repeated pat-
terns, these sequences or patterns may be entered into memory as a subprogran
to sinplify programming.
The subprogram can be ca11ed in AUTO mode. A subprogram can call another
subprogram.
hthen the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one loop sub-
program ca11. Thus, two loop subprograrn call can be executed as shown below.
However, four loop subprogram call can be executed using custom macro.
Main program Sub program Sub propgam
010001
I
I
r{98P]000;
A call command can call a subprogram repeatedly A call command can specify
up to 999 repeations of a subprogram.
a) Preparation of subprogram
A subprogram is prepared in the following format:
O(:)XXXX; Subprogram number
Subprograrn
Mqa.
At the top of subprogram, a subprogram No. identifying the subprogram is
specified after "0" (EIA) or ":" (IS0). Specify M99 at the end of a sub-
program. Subprogram end command 'rM99rt need not be sneeified in a block by
itself.
(Example) X M99 ;
For how to enter subprograms into memory, see Chapter III-9.1.1
(Note t) For compatibility of the CNC tape with other devices, "i{xxxx" is also
used as a subprogram No. instead of 0(:).
A sequence number under N is registered as a subprogram number.
b) Subprogram e.xecution
A subprogram is executed when cal1ed by the main program or another
subprogram.
A subprogram call has the following format:
-L5-
M98P00000000
Subprogram number
Number of times the subprogram
is to be repeated.
When the repetition times is omitted, the subprogram is repeated once.
(Example) t'tggPS1002;
This command is read "Ca11 the subprogram (subprogram number 1002) five
times.tt
The subprogram catl command (M9BP ) and a move command can be
specified in the same b1ock.
- 70 -
ffi.
*:.:
4.
ii) If the M99 command is executed in the main program, control returns to
the start of the main program. For example, a " ll"l99;" block is j-n-
serted in the proper position of Ehe main program and the optional
block skip is off' M99 is executed, and control returns to the start of
the main program and the program is executed again.
rf the optional block skip is turned on, "/1499;" is omitted and control
is passed to the next block.
If "/M99Pn;" has been inserted, control does not return to the start,
but returns to the block whose sequence number is ttntt. The processing
time for return to sequence number n is lonqer than return to the
start.
- 7t -
N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040 -;
Optional block N0050
skip OFF N0060
/N0070M99P0030;
Optional block
N0080
skip ON
N00901'102; ;
iii) It is possible to execute a subprogram from the start by specifying a
search for it from the IDr keyboard as well as the main program.
(Refer to III 10.4 and 10.9 for the search operation).
In this case' if the M99 command is executed, control returns to the
top of the subprogram and execution is repeated. IfttMggPn;" is exe-
cuted, control returns to the block whose sequence number is rrnrr and
execution ls repeated.
In the above operation, if you want to stop execution, insert "fl'1021"
or the "/M30;" at the appropriate position. Lrhen the optional block
skip swi-tch is turned off, the above cornmand is executed and the pro-
gram 1s terminated. In the example be1ow, execution will continue
while the optional block skip i-s on and will stop when the optional
block skip is turned off.
Nl 040
N1050
Nr060 ,
/Nr070 M02;
N1080 M99 P1050;
Subrogram 5555
(Note 1) In ISO code, colon (:) can be used instead of O.
(Note 2) A block with an optional block skip code such as /uoz3, /M30; or /ugg:
is not regarded as the end of a program.
- 72 -
(Note 3) When lhe program number is not specified at the st.art of the program,
the first sequence number (N...) in that program is regarded as the
program number. However, N0 is not used as the program number.
(Note 4) When nej-ther program number nor sequence number are specified, a pro-
gram number must be specified from the CRT/IDI when the program is
registered.
(Note 5) When a taPe contains more than one program, an EOB code j-s unnecessary
before the second and subsequent programs. However, when a preceding
program ends with ER (EIA code) or % (IS0 code) r 3o EOB code is
necessary at the head of a program. This is because of the 1abel skip
f eature .
/rr^+^ 4.\ ru
u/ r- Duure cases, program numbers nnnn n
\L\uLE ----L^-^ 9000-9899 are reservEd and cannot be
used by users.
12.4.3 Sequence number and block
A prograu is composed of several commands.
One command is ca11ed a block.
One block is separated from another block with an end of block code.
manual uses ; as the end of block code.
!- nro"r. Brock
--l l- Block
- t? _
The following range is ignored when the optional block skip switch is 0N.
; /2Nl23G0lX4. ....; N7856
lr
l- Range ignored I
Example:
Nr00XI00;
/2Nl0lZi00;
/213Nr02x200;
/3N1032200;
In the above example, the blocks of NlOl and NI02 when switch No.2 is ON, and
the blocks of Nl02 and Nl03 when switch No.3 is ON, are skipped.
(Note 1) A slash (/) must be specified at the start of a block. If it is placed
elsewhere in the block, the information from the slash (l) to the EOB
code is ignored, r^rhile information before the slash (l) is ef fective.
(Note 2) \tlhen the optional block skip switch is ON, TH and TV checks are
performed for skipped portions, as when the switch is OFF.
(Note 3) The optional block skip is identified when the information is read into
Lhe buffer storage from the tape or memory. I^lhen a block preceded by a
slash has been read into the buffer, it is not ignored even if the
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is turned on.
(Note 4) This function is also effective during a sequence number search.
(Note 5) When storing the program in memory, this function is ineffective. A
block with a slash (/) is also stored in the memory regardless of the
position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.
(Note 6) When punchi$g out the program from memory, the program is punched out
regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.
(Note 7) Some of the optional block skip switches (l to 9) may not be used on
some machine tools. Ask the machine tool manufacturer how many
sr^iitches can be used.
(Note 8) If more than one optional block skip code is specified in a block for
the system with additional optional block skip function, I in /l cannot
be omitted.
Please specify /1 under Ehe above condition.
(Example)
Error
-m Gooxlo.o;
Correct
--7TTz cooXro. o:
l
&
fiL
| ,:
I - 74 -
1,.+.
I
Function Address Meaning
Tool function .F
Tool number, tool offset number
Miscellaneous function M ON/OFF control on the machine t,ool
B Index of table, etc.
Offset nunber H Designation of offset number
N X Y s T M
\
Sequence----r--
-_-f_
heparatory Dimension Feed Spindle Tool Miscellaneous
number function rvord function function function iunction
In the next Process sheet example, one line represents a b1ock. And one frame
in a block is a word.
-75-
Progran name -Note
Test Program 2 Da te
Proglam number '85.10.10
o(:) zooz Programmer
x1 96. 0 Y3 15. 0
\
I
Sri
F
12.4.6 Basic addresses and command value range
The basic addresses and command value range are listed in Table L2.4.6. Note
that these figures give the maximum numerical liurit, not the mechanical limit of
the CNC machine tool. Under CNC control, the tool rnay traverse up to 10 m (in
millimeter input) along the X axi-s, but actually travelling distance may be
lirnited to 2 m for the specific machine tool. Sirnilarly, CNC control may permit
a maximum cutting feed of 25 m/min., but the CNC machine tool may be limited to
3 m/min. The manual issued by the machine tool manufacturer should be closely
consulted' in addition to this rnanual when programming to ensure that the actual
limitations of the specific machine tool are not exceeded.
Table 12.4.6 Basic address and command value range
Designation of sequence
number, number of P r- 9999999 | - 9999999
ranafil-innc
- l7 -
12.5 Comment Section
The information punched between the control out and the cont.rol in codes shown
below is all considered as a comment and is skipped . Since a TH check is not
performed, a heading, cofi[nents, and indications for the operator can be punched
by combining any code of arbitrary holes. The TV check is oerformed on the
conment section.
Channei 7 a\
v
Channel 5
Channel 4 Channel 4 -)
oo o o o o o o o o oo o
Channei 2 Channel 2 a)
l^'
u
Control In
.
Control Out c
l
(Exarnple) In IS0 code
LF
r
N1000c00x. LF
(MEASURE WORK.........) LF
Nl00 1G0 lx LF
LF
When a command tape is read into memory, for memory-controlled operation, the
comment section is read into memory. However, codes not listed in Appendix 7
are ignored and are not read into memory. When daEa in the memory is punched
out, information in the Comment Section is also punched out. The Comment Sec-
+i ^.. i!>^ urDPr4J
Lfurr ,r't ^*1 ^-'ed on the program screen. However, codes ignored when read-in
are neither punched nor displayed on the CRT screen.
During a memory-controlled operation in memory command mode, the comment section
in memory is ignored and operation is executed.
(ExarnpIe) Used as heading
F1000cR( )N 110
(Note l) The rewind stop code (Z or ER) cannot be used in the comment section.
Reading this code resets the CNC.
(Note 2) When a connent section is in the middle of a Program section and is
long, movement is interrupted for a long time. Therefore, insert
corment sections in a place where movement can be interrupted or a
place specifying no movement.
- 18 -
(Note 3) The length of the conment sectj-on is unlimited.
(Note 4) When the eontrol out code does not come first and only the control in
code is read in, it is ignored.
(Note 5) The TV check for the comment section can be disabled by sp eci fy ing
paramerer TVC. (Data No. 0000)
The end of a program is indicated by punching the following code at the end of
the Program Section.
EIA T. SO Meaning
When the End of Program is sensed during the execution of a programr the CNC
unit terminates the execution of the program and enters a reset state. In case
of M30CR or I'130LF, the program is returned to its beginning (in l'femory Courmand
-^r^\
IIUUE,/ .
rrL^-
Wrrgrl -L.e
Ltr subprogram. end code is sensed in a subprogram, control is
returned to the program which called the subprogram. (Whether or not the tape
is rewound by exeeution of I'130 depends on the machine tool.)
12.7 Tape End
The end of a tape is indicated by punching the code below immediately following
the Program End of the last program on a tape. t
ER Tape End
(Note) If M02 and M30 are not at the end of the program section, and ER (EIA) or
Z (IS0) is about to be executed, the CNC enters the reset state.
12.8 Tape Format
The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as tape
format.
12.9 Tape Codes
Eit,her the EIA or the IS0 code can be used as tape codes The input program
code is distinguished with the first end of block code. See Tape Codes in
Appendix l.
fn
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
A canned cycle siruplifies the program by using a single block with a G code to
specify the nachining operations usually specifleci in several blocks.
Table 13.1 lists canned cycles.
Table 13.'l Canned cycles
G code
Drilling Operation at the Re trac t ion
(-Z direction) bottom of a hole (+Z direcrion) Applicat ion
-80-
F
Operation I
Initial point
I
I I
Operation 2 *l I
I
I
l+ Operation 6
I
Point R J I
9
I
I
I l* Operation 5
I I
Operation 3-l I
-- -+ Rapid traverse
I
I I Feed
t I
/ -
Operation 4
c89
(Note) The initial level means the absolute value
of the Z-axls
changing fron the canned cycle cancel mode into the canned aL the tine of
cycle mode.
- 8t -
a) Fig. 13.1 (b) shows how to specify data according to the rnode (C90 or G9I)
G90 G91
n
v____*" I
z=o
I Rl
-|ts-T1 R
PoinrR"ll
!ll
z r.in'n- llt
lir I I
Point Z
-r
tit
O-
Poirt Z
*L--i
Absoiute Incremental
G98
| | Initial Initial
level ,z level
V--- -*o/ rlrl
rl
rl Point R
Ir sz/ level
lr
ll
t!
ll
llo'
Initial level return Point R level return
G [tr X a r.
.\'
."
+{f
lll.--.
LNumber of
repeat s
I I
II - Hole position data
Drilling mode -Dritlingdata
-82-
llrl lllno m^dp
[[ See Table 13.1
Hole positlon ;;;;' rxl Specifies the hole position by an increnental or
absolute value. The path and feed rate are the
I.YJ
same as G00 pcsitioning.
Drilling data Specifies the distance fron point R to the bottom
of the hole in Fig. 13.1 (a) with an increnental
value or the position of the hole bottom with an
absolute value. The feed rate is specified in the
F code in operation 3.
In operatJon 5, it becomes the rapid traverse rate
or the feed rate specified in the F code, accordlng
to the drilling mode.
Specifies the d.j stance frorn the initial 1eve1 to
polnt R 1eve1 in Fig, 13.1 (a) with an absolute
value. The feeC rate i-s the rapid traverse rate in
operatlon 2 and 6.
Specifies each cut-in value with G73 and GB3 or the
shift value with G76 and G87. (Always speclfled
with an increnrental value.)
Specifies the dwe11 time at the botton of the hole.
The relationship betrveen the time and the specified
value is the same as for G04.
F ... Specifies the feed rate;
Number of K ... Specifies the number of repeats for a series cf
repea t s operation 1 to 6. When K is not specifled, K = 1
is assumed.
When K = 0 is specified, the drllling data is
sinply stored, and drilling ls not performed.
Since the drilling node (GID remains unchanged untl1 another drilling node
is speci-fied or the canned cycle is cancelled with a G code, j-t must not be
speclfied any blocks when the same drilling mode continues. G80 and the 0l
group G codes are used to cancel a canned cycle. Once the drilling data has
been specified in the canned cycle, it is retained until it is changed or the
canned cycle is cancelled. Therefore, all requlred drilllng data shal1 be
specified when the canned cycle is started and only data to be changed sha11
be specified during the cycle.
The number of repeats K shall be specifled only when operation $ust be re-
peated. Data K is not retalned. The feed rate specified with the F code ls
retained even if the canned cycle ls cancelled.
When the system is reset during the canned cycle, the drilling mode, drllllng
data, hole position data and repetition count are deleteC.
An example of the above data retention and deletion ls shown below.
C
x coo x Mo3;
@ G8IX Y-Z-_R-F-K- ; .....
In the beglnning, Z, R, and F speclfy necessary
values. Drilling ls repeated K times according to
c81 .
O Y _; . Slnce the drllling mode and drllling data are the
same as those specif ied in O , G8 l, Z _, R _,
and F can be ornltted. The hole posltion moves
only f6T Y _ and drilling is performed only once
accordi.ng to G8l.
@ c82x K-;
ThEFole posltlon moves only for X _ from O and
the hole is drilled according to G82 with Z, R, and
F speclfled ln @ and the drilling data P specl-
fled in @. Thls Ls repeated K times,
-83-
/;\
\)-/ G80 X Mq.
L LJ
,
machining position
Present
First
machining position
G81 X K5F _;
X Y _ specifies
-it the first drilling positi-on for an incremental
cofrand- (egi)]f f is specif ied for an absolute cornmand (c90), a hole is
repeatedly drilled at the salne position. The canned cycle automatic
deceleration time constant is automatically switched to the rapid traverse or
feed tirne constant according to the feed used for each operation. At the end
point; the tool decelerates and moves on to the next sequence. However, when
return frorn the bottom of the hole to the R 1evel is performed at the rapid
traverse rate with G98 (initial 1evel return) (for example, G8I), the tool
does not decelerate, but inmediately returns to the initial level at the
rapid traverse rate.
Each hole machining operation is detailed below.
-84-
I 1) G73 (High-speed peck drilling cycle)
E
3
i G73',(G98) G73 (G99)
:':
.e
t
Initial point
I
I
u_*,
iJ
Point R
I
I
I
I
+ I
i, I
I
{} I
:"t
I
.: I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\l
Ir
6
Point Z
The retraction is set by a paranelgr --_(No. 0531). Sinc-e rhe Z-axis direction
int"TmiiiEnr--Itad simplifies ai;pbsaf'-?nd p'ermlts a very small
retraction value to be set in "trip
deep hole dr1lling, efficient machining is
performed. Retraction is performed at the rapid traverse rate.
2) c74 (Left-handed tapping cycle) _
i Spindle
i ,/'"*
tr@
Rapid
traverE
*''. Feed
I T
Point z
| |
ol
O\ spindre
cw
:
j
At the bottom of the hole, the splndle rotates clockwise and left-handed
tapping perforroed.
{ (Note) During left-handed tapping speclfied in G74, rhe feed rare override ls
! i-gnored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return
E
E
operation, even if a feed hold is applied.
-6)-
3) G76 (fine boring cYcle)
Spindle C\!
)l
"'*F1 Initial
pornt
Point R
Point Z
Point Z
l+ Shift amount q
Since a spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the
spindl.e retracts after shifting i-n the direction opposite to the cutter
direction, high precision and efficient boring is performed without scratch-
ing the workpiece surface.
(Note) The shift value is specified by Q. The Q value is always a positive
value. If a negative value is specified, the sign is ignored. For
the shift directionr dny of +X, -X, *Y and -Y is selected by setting
parameter (data No. 0002). The Q value is modal in the canned cycle.
Since it is also used as the cut-in value for G73 and G83, specify it
carefully.
-86-
/+) G80 Canned cycle cancel
The canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G81 to GB9) is cancelled and normal opera-
tion is subsequently performed. The points R and Z are aI'so cancelled.
(That is, R = 0 ar,d Z = 0 for the incremental command.) other drilling data
is also cancelled.
5) c8l (drilling cycle' spot boring cycle)
\ U6I G81 (c99)
'\ ./
n
v______*?
Imtial
polnt
I
Point R :.Glr.-,
1t
ll
Point Z llll
o Point Z
---*Rapid travelse
feed
I
___---* ?
Initial
pornt
tilr Poirt R
Point R
llll
lr
Point Z
'@ Point Z
,'Jr"{ 6-- D well
This is the same as G81. Dwell (specified by the P code) is performed at Eire
bottom of the hole and the spindle is raised. Dwell at the bottom of the
hole improves the hole depth precision in blind hole dri1ling.
i) c83 (Peck drilllng cYcle)
r:
tl Initial
r:
ll
|./
v-----? point
ql
-t
T- lts
cf It i li tt
A-
o>
qlT-:- of-"-i-llT
- t
^T-
YI qT- ----iJ-T At r- a
Point Z
G83 X Y _ Z _ a _ R _ F _;
The coromand above specifies the peck drilling cycle. a is the cut-i.n value
each time and specify with an incremental value. When the second and sub-
sequent cut-in is performed, rapid traverse- is switched to feed by d nn (or
inch) before the position where cut-in is performed. The specified Q value
must always be positive. If a negative value is specified, the FlEn*is
lgnored. The d value is set by parameter (data No. 0532).
8) c84 (tapping cycle)
r: R
V----+ o Initial v____+o
I t:""' I ,snittar" c*
I tG). spinare cw
Ii/ i@/
ll
*'-'*
li'-17
tl
li
ll po.,z
il Pottz
tl
O-- rni*.* $- rn"u," ".rn
RaPid traverse
+ Feed
The spindie is reversed at the bottom of the hole and the tapping cycle ls
perrontreo
(Note) During tapping specified in G84, the feed rate override is ignglad,;tnd
the cycle does.-not _s:9-p-_""!i!_,the-snd.-o-f the reTTrrfrEeTefi-on, .even lf
feed hold is applled.
-88-
+-rr.
9) cB5 (boring cycle)
0____*" ..-9
I
il I
I
il I
ti I I
I
ll
I
I
to
r: snndtec$
U ,
1l
',* -9 I
I
I
I
I
I
t
o
Rapid traverse
Feed
:.
:
*
F
3:
s
a
G:
G.
G
*-
_89_
1l) G87 (boring cycle/back boring cycle)
G87 (G99)
11 @s5)f=1
/L--=6 =+ I Initial
/ + tti point
Spindle CW t i
,,=: !l
+ | pointZ
vlt Rated traverse
^\Y:Yi
lr<-
A
\Spindte CW
Point R
+ Shift
After the tool is positioned along the X and Y axes, the spindle stoPs at
the orientation position. The spindle i-s then shifted in the direction
opposite to the tool and is positioned at the botton of the hole (Point R)
at the rapid traverse rate. At this position, the tool returns only for the
shift value and the spindle rotates clockwise. Machining is performed up to
the point Z in the positive direction of the Z axis. At this position, the
splndle again stops at the orientation position and shifts in the direction
opposiEe to the tool and the tool is withdrawn from the hole. After the
tool returns to the initial point, it returns only for the shift value. The
spindle rotates clockwise and the tool moves according to the command of the
next b1ock. The-shift value and direct.ion are the same as those for G76.
(Direction setti;g is common to both G76 and G87.)
L2) c88 (boring cycle)
I spindle cw
I
-
SPindle CW
,..'
II
I
Point R
I
{
Poht z )
(D
'...--
spindle stop
after drvell
o- Spirdle stop
after dwell
Rapid iraverse
Feed
Manual feed
-90-
#.
Sr
E-
,5
a 9, Initial
i!rl I
I
I
ll
rl I
IIr
I
I Point R
Point R
ll Ir
tltl
6',
rDl
PontZ II Point Z
(P)
uweil
This is the same as G85, but dwe1l is performed at the bottorn of Ehe ho1e.
14) Rigid mode
To set the rigid mode, specify M29s*J^**1 before command of tappi_ng cycle and
reverse tapping cycle.
By this operation, the spindle stops, the rigid mod.e Dr signal turns on, and the
rigid mode j-s set for the. tapping cycle or reverse tapping cycle which i^IS
commanded next.
l'129 is called a rigid tapping prepare auxiliary function. The rigid tapping
Prepare auxiliary functj-on code can be changed to another M-code by setting the
corresPonding value in the parameter 0256, However, 1429 is used fhroughout thi-s
manual to make the description consistent.
Specify GBO; to reset the rigid mode. The rigid mode can also be reset by the
another canned cycle G-code or the group 01G code, that ls, the commands that
clear the tapping cycle.
The rigid mode DI signal is turned off by this rigid mode reset conmand.
Irrhen the rigid tapping is ended by the rigid mode reset command, the spindle
stops and the S-code goes to the state with S0 specified.
The ri-gid mode can also be reset by the reset operation (reset button, external
reset). However, note that the canned cycle mode is not reset bv the reset
operation.
I
I
I
M2qS**XX.t
G7 4 /c84X-Y Z._R-P-F-K- -]
XY
_____t
XY Rigid mode
G80;
Precautions on camrnand
a) F /5***x is a screw lead.
b) 5T-*** nusg be lower than the value set in the parameter (No. 0617).
Otherwise, p/S alarm occurs in the G f] f] block. (Refer to Section 5
for the alarm No.)
c) F must be lower Ehan the cutting feed rate upper limit value
(piraureter No. 527) . Otherwise, P/S alarm (011) occurs.
- 91 -
d) Don't specify S and axis motion berween M29 and G ! !.
Donr t specify 1429 during tapping cyc1e. p/S afarrn occurs in both
cases.
e) Donrt speeify S in the block immediately after rhe block of c | [ and
GBO.
n r-1 t-]|
v I ll ...., Co rrec E
UU
-92-
Drvell is applied anC waits for the nornrrl
spindle rotation.
n
V *o{_-*, Tl-
til
ltJ
T
GOOM :
GB6X Y Z R F :
GOa P ]; is perforrned, but drilling is not performed)
XY: -(Dwell
G04 P ; (Dwell is performed, but drilling is not performed)
XY:
aa- is performed, but drilling is not performed)
j -t -tlwell
-93-
Program exampl-e using tool length offset and a canned eycle ffi
Reference point ffi
ffi
r
F:-i
Ft*
[.: :
I
I
F.r,'
F
I
3t:
I E.:
t t#6
T-
8
,l-
/T\ #10
/+.
Yi
|
ffi
Y
| +r'
il
/t\ #9
E
|
F
I
t_
I
tr
H
Retract position F
Z
I F
I
E
Tll Ti5
/--s
tl
F
tl
_T__
fF=
rF=
Fr__-__J
-n -E
E
F
c
i-U Ln
T-T-
L_u E
F
Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.1l, *190.0
+150.0 is set in offset No.3l. is set in offset No. l5, and
E
F
ft
-94- F
;
Program example
,
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Coordinate setting at reference poinr
N002 G90 G00 2250.0
T11 M6; Tool change
N003 G43 ZO Hll; Initial level, tool length offset
N004 S30 M3; Spindle start
N005 G99 G8l X400.0
Y-350.0 2-153.0
R-97.0 Fl20; Positioning, then /11 drilling
N006 Y-550.0; Positioning, then /i2 drilling and point R level return
N007 G98 Y-750.0; Positioning, then //3 drilling and initial level return
N008 G99 XI200.0; Positioning, then /14 drilling and point R'level return
N009 Y-550.0; Positioning, then ii5 drilling and point R leve1 return
N010 G98 Y-350.0; Positioning, then //6 drilling and j-nitial 1eve1 return
NOil G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop
N0l2 G49 2250.0 T15
M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N013 G43 ZO H15; Initial level, tool length offset
N014 S20 M3; Spindle start
N0l5 c99 G82 X550.0
Y-450.0 Z-130.0
R-97.0 P300 F70; Positioni-ng, then /i7 drilling, point R 1evel return
N016 G98 Y-650.0; Positioning, then /18 drilling, initial leve1 return
N017 G99 X1050.0; Positioning, then ii9 drilling, poJ.nt R level return
N018 G98 Y-450.0; Positioning, then /i10 dri11ing, initial level return
N0l9 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop
N020 c49 2250.0 T3l
M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N02i c43 Z0 H31; Initial level, tool length offset
N022 StO M3; Spindle start
N023 cB5 c99 x800.0
Y-350.0 Z-t53.0 t
R47.0 F50; Positioning, then /ll1 drilling, point R leve1 return
N024 G91 Y-200.0 K2; Positioning then i/12, 13 drilling, point R 1eve1 return
N025 G28 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop
N026 G49 Z0; Tool length offset cancel
N027 M0; Program stop
(Note) When the number of repeats is specifled by K in G98 and G99, the tool
returns to the initial level (G9B) or point R level (G99) from the first
hole.
13.2 External Motion Function (G80, G81)
G81 ]P
Thi; an external motion function signal to be sent to the
".ur*t"a--Lnables
machine tool side from the CNC every time the positioning to IP is completed and
thi e _qi^o^^-.-
on:'l i s used to perform operations such as clamplng, drilling, and
punching and cycles on the machine tool side.
Thie eionel ic sent every positioning until it is cancelled with a G80 and G
-.;
code in group 0i command. The external motion signal is not sent during exe-
cution of block that does not contain neither X nor Y. Parameter (No. 0011,
MCF) determines whether G8l ls used as an external operation function or as a
canned cycle.
;
*.
t
G:
5,
* -95-
14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
mm input 'in^1'
rrrLrr fi-^,,+
rrPu L
-96-
:k;
F:
3j
&'
ry.'
Dr.
f,. /\ Example of tool length compensation
.+ )
't
(No. l, 2 and 3 borings)
+
a-
";l
I /t
I
'-----vT-r
-\{
-,6
i;
i-- I v--
z\i\G|
\9 +Y
-\/ a
\t) ,--'I -1-rr
-
t\
1...
+z
h -97-
14.1.2 Tool length offset B
ci7) ^,^\ z
ci8l :i;l
b'+'+., Y
GIgj x ]'
or
GITl nrr\
Grsl
Glgj u'+'+J
::ll H ,
The tool offset irtwo or more axes can be commanded bv two or more blocks as
shown below.
(Exarnple) 0ffset 1 n X and Y axes.
G19 G43 H , Offset in X axis
GI8 G43 H , Offset in Y axis (Offset in X and Y axes is
performed)
2) Direction of offset
G43 * side offsec
G44 - side offset
In any case of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount that has
been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and
in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of the
specified axis movement coumand. The coordinate value after the calculation
becomes the terminal point.
When the movement command for the specified axis was omitted. 1t is taken in
the same way as,
GI7'l c6?t Z0l
crsi ."'++)
:;;l Y0f H
GlgJ xo,J
and it moves by the offset amount in the + direction in G43 and 1n the
- direction in G44.
G 43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the
same group is programmed.
Assignment of offset amount
Assign offset number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the
offset memory is added to or subtracted from the programmed command value for
the specified axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 to H200.
However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for
cutter compensation.
The offset amount rnay be set in the offset memory through The CRT/I'DI panel.
The range of values t.hat can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
-98-
mm input inch input
0ffsec amount 0 - +999.999 mm 0 - +99.9999 inch
(Note 2) In the case of the offset in three axes, if t.he of f set is cancelled
by G49 code, the P/S alarm 015 is generated. Cancel the offset by
usinq G49 and H00.
14.2 Cutter Compensation B {G39 - G42\
-99-
14.2.2 Offset amount (H codel
The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to max. 200 offsets.
(However, they are 200 offsets in total for tool length offset and cutter
compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the
H code commanded on the program, and shall be set via the CRT/l-DI. (For
details, refer to item III I0. I. l).
The range of values in which the offseE amount can be set is as followsl
-r00-
&
&
g:
$a
New
center path (X, Y)
t\
or (I, J)
,Tool Gr_ ___
,'ha- Tool center path
1T New vector
*(*,")
Old vector
ord vecto/ or (r. J)
I
tl \\
Fig. 14.2.5 (a) In case of G41 Fig. 14.2.5 (b) In case of G42
This command can be given in offset mode, that is, only when G4l or G42 has
already been specified. Whether the arc is to turn clockwise or
counterclockwise, is defined by G4I or G42, respectlvely. This command is not
moda1, and executes circular interpolation, whatever the G function of group 01
nay be. The G function of group 01 remains even through this conmand is
specified.
14.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40)
The command G40X Y ; in G00 or G01 specifies each axis to move
straightly from tnlpo-int o}-tn. old vector on the start point toward the end
point in G01 mode and eaeh axis to move at rapid traverse in G00 mode. This
command speeifies the eguipment to enter from the cutter compensation mode into
i:
;:
the cancel mode.
=i
:J
*-
q
Old vector
s
{g':
Start point
::
+
i
When onlyG4O; is specified, and X Y is not specified, the tool
I moves the old vector amount in the opp-E3Fe diffion.
**
ri
F
*.
*t
-rot-
14.2.7 Cutter compensation left (G41)
I) Case of c00, cOl
ThecommandG4lX Y I J H :
specifies a new vG-r t6JF"."iFat@i-t anffi with the direction of
(I, J) on the end point, and the tool center moves toward the point of the
new vector from that of the o1d vector on the start point.
(I, J) is expressed in an incremental value from the end point, and is
significant only as a direction, and its amount is arbitrary.
center patl
New vector
\ (I , J)
Start point programmed path
In case the old vector is zero, this command specifies the equipment to enter
from the cancel mode into the cutter compensation mode. At this time, the
offset number is specified bv the H code.
New vector
Start poinl
Tool center path
*o(r.J)
(x
Programmed path
III or J is omitted, (I, J) is assumed to be the same as (X, Y). That is,
the conrnand G4 I X Y ; specifies a new vector at right angles with
(x, Y) to be creatEdl-
New vector
rY Yl
Programmed path
If, however, G00 is specified, each axis moves independently at. the rapid
traverse rate.
2) Case of c02, G03
'1'
The commald
;
G02(c03)X Y R ;
specifies a tteffitorE-be cEl-ea to the left looking toward the direction
in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end
point, and the tool center to move along t,he arc advancing from the point of
the old vector on the arc starE point toward that of the new vector. This
is, however, established on assumption the old vector is created correctly.
The offset vector is created toward the arc center or opposite direction
agalnst the arc eenter.
-102-
*:
fe
i
Tool center path
vector
Progammed path
R Old vector
Start point
P$,J)
I
Programmed path
t New vectot
x
I
/t/'-
t
$
G42X
New vector
Start point
Tool center path
Old vector
In the case of G00, however, each axis moves independently at the rapid
Eraverse rate.
-r03-
z) Case of c02, G03
G42X
Example 14.2.8(a)
Y axis
I
I
| -xoi,
Unit: mm
Example 14.2.8(b)
Programmed path
Y axis
| _ **,
Unit: mm
-104-
2) Change from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode
A move command at the time of change from the offset cancel mode to the cut-
ter compensation mode, must be positioning (G00) or linear interpolation
(G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used.
Change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode
A move command at the time of change from the cutter compensation mode to the
offset cancel mode, must be positioning (G00) or li-near interpolation (G0l).
The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used.
4) Switch between cutter compensation left and cutter compensation right
The offset direction is switched from left to right, or frorn right to left
generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be s\,/itched not through it
only i-n positioning (G00) or linear interpolarion (G0l).
In this case, the tool path is as showl be1ow.
Newvector 2$'t)
Tool center
path
/' / -/ --
New vector
(Generally not \
straight)
Programmed path
Old vector
vector
c41 ; c42 ;
GOOG42X Y ; GOlG41X Y I J F
-105-
(a) Tool center pa*t (b) Tool center path
Tool center path made in accordance with positive or negative value of tool offset
14.2,10 Programexample
axis
t
I
I
I X axis
Unit: mm
Zero point
O c9l cr7 coo c4r Y2o.oo rio8; (H08 is a tool offset number, and the
cutter radius value should be stored in the
memory corresponding to this number).
@ G}I Z-25.00 F100;
o Y40.00 F250;
@ c39 r40 .00 J.20 .00 ;
/:\
\) x40.00 Y20.00;
@ G39 r40.00;
o c02 x40.00 Y-40.00 R40.00;
@ x-20.00 Y-20.00 R20.00;
@ c01 x-60.00;
@ G00 Z-25.00;
@ c40 Y-20.00 Ia02;
-106-
;'. ., .' i
_, 1^l
"na is carried out in the plane determined by
Eion Gl7, Glg and Gl9,
igo; plane selection.) This plane is ca1led the offset plane. For
Iwhen the xY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
6ut usitg (X, Y) )t (I, J) in the program tape and rhe vector is com-
The coordinate values of an axis not in the offset plane are not subject
lf.lEli;"'offset, and the command values for that axis on the program tape are used
aa theY are.
in stmuttaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is
comPensated.-
The offset Plane must be changed dur:ing the offset cancel mode. If it is per-
formed during the offset mode, an alarm (No. 37) is displayed and the machine is
s topped.
G code Function
c40 Cutter compensation cancel
Cutter compensation left
G42 Cutter compensation right
A G4l or G42 command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and a G40
command causes the equipment to enter the cancel node.
The offset procedure, for example, is explained in the next figure.
The block Q) is called the start-up. In this block, the offset cancel mode is
changed to the offset mode (G41). At the end point of thls block, the tool
center is translated by the cutter radius in the direction being vertlcal to the
next block path (from Pl to P2). The cutter conopensation value ls specified by
H07, namely the offset nurbber is 7, and G41 means the cutter compens"li-otr 1eft.
After being startiup, when the workpiece shape is programmed as PI + p2 ->
P8 + p9 + Pl, the cutter compensation is performed automatically.
In the block (! , the cutter returns to the start_ point by corornanding G40
(of f set cancel) . At the end point of the block @-, the cutter center is
translated vertically to the prograrnmed path (from P9 to pl).
At the end of the program, the G40 (offset cancel) must be commanded.
-108-
program of cutter compensation C
Example of
cr (700, 1300)
Ps(900,11s0)
P4(s00,11s0)
@
c3
(-l s0 c2 (1sso , 1sso)
(4so eoo)
izso , soo)P3 '
(1 ls0 , s50)
@ r0\
\:/
(^/ / Unit: mm
"l
/'(\
Y a-ris
a7\
tol
art poin
G92 XO YO ZO;
rn
\v Nl c90 c17 c00 c41 H07 X250.0 Y550.0 In advance, the offset
/l amount must be set with
\:/ N2 cOl Y900.0 F150; the offset number 07.
o
/;\
N3 X450.0;
\v
/:\
N4 c03 X500.0 Yr1s0.0 R650.0;
\) N5 c02 X900.0 R-250.0;
@ N6 c03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0;
(, N7 cOi xl150.0;
@ N8 Y550.0;
o N9 X700.0 Y650.0;
@ NlO x 250.0 Y550.0;
@ Nll c00 G40 x0 Y0;
- 109
*"i$fj
Progtammed
c ) 180"
Ou:er .side
hoglammed path
-110-
a) When going around an inside corner (180" s0)
i) Linear + Linear ii) Linear + Arc
Programmed path
path
.\
/t \\ Programmed path
Hereafter, in the figures
1 S means a single block stop poinr
{ L indicates a straight line. Tool center path
t C indicates an arc.
b) When the tool goes around the outside of a corner dL an obtuse angle
(90" Sct5IB0").
Tool path in start up or cancel has two types d rnd R. and they are select-
ed by paraneter SUPM (Data No. 0016).
Type A i) Linear -> Linear fi) Linear + Arc
Programmed paih
L
Tool center path
Programmed
Tool center path
parh
II
/ ll
Programmed
;3/.[_
/\.
'r Programmed path
(Note) The intersection is the In tersectlon Tool center path
point where two offset
paths calculated by con-
tinuous two blocks are
intersected.
III
c) Llhen going around the outside of an acute angle (a < 90.)
Ilp" A i) Linear + ii) Iinear -) Arc
Programmed path
., Progr'immed paih
Tool center path
t. \
LTz _
*
E.
{'
1
i
3) In offset mode
In the offset mode, offset ls performed correctly, if non-positioning com-
mands such as auxiliary functions or dwell would not be prograrutred in two or
more successive blocks. Otherwise overcuttlng or undercutting wi1l,occur.
Offset plane must not be changed during offset mode. Otherwise an alaru is
displaved and the tool stoDs.
Programmed path
Programmed path
Progranrmed
- lI3 -
b) when going around an outside corner at an obtuse angle (90 < c < Ig0o)
i) Linear + Linear ii) Linear + Arc
r{.____
S L Tool center path i-i
t"l L
lntr$ecting T,
pornt \
point L
S ho$ammed path
lqteriecting Tool mer path C"
'Iooi center path
-IT4-
- - -.r+!'.,r ;
,:+siF.. g
'_' ;1a: g
' lil: rl'-;i n
Programmed path
Programmed path
d) Exceptional cases
i) The end point of arc is not oq the arc
If there is an arc, lead-in line
as shown, assume an imaginary
circle which passes through the
Imaginary
arc end point and is concen-trical
-\ to the arc, and draw vectors for
Programmed comp ensa t ion , on th e as s ump t i-on
End oi arc
that the cutter compensation has
Lead arc\ been carried out for
\l
1
u.S the
, \ \ \,i imaginary circle. As a result, a
/ ,.\' path for the cutter center, is
{^o' established, which is differenr
from the path compensa t ed
according to the program that
regards the arc lead-in l-ine as a
straight 1ine.
Similarly consider a case of
2Ta-A?.
- ll5 -
ii') There is no inner intersecting point
In regard to the left figure, the
intersecting point of the arcs is
present on the offset path if the
offset value is smaIl, but it may
Al.n alarm occutes
annd the tool stops
disappear if the offset value is
\\rhen the off \EL
amount is lar quite large. In this case, alarm
fn. centel (No. 33) occurs at the end point
1
When the offsel amo .of t he arc B The center
of the arc A
of the preceding block, and Ehe
small
Progranrmed
tool will stop.
parh Concerning the left figure, there
is an intersecting point P of Ehe
offset paths for the arcs A and
B, if the offset value is smal1,
but the intersecting point cannot
be found if the offset value is
quite 1arge.
iii) The center of the arc is identical with the start Doint or end Doint
If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end
point, Alarm No. 38 is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end
point of the preceding block.
(G4I rnode)
F
An alarm is generated N5 c01 X1000;
and the tool stoPs N6 GO2 XIOOO IO JO;
Tool center path N7 c03 Y-1000 J-1000;
Programmed
4) Offset cancel
In the offset mode, vrhen a block which satisfies any one of the following
conditions is executed, the equipment enters the cutter compensation cancel
mode, and the action of this block is ca11ed the offset cancel.
a) G40 has been commanded.
b) H00 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter compensation.
Lhen performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not
available. -'If a circular arc is commanded, an alarm (No. 34) is generated
and the tool stops.
In the offset cancel, the control executes the instructions in that block and
the block in the cutter compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of
a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and
stoPS. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed
without reading the next block.
Then the control is in the cancel mode, and norma11y, the btock to be
executed. next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is not
read into the buffer for cutter compensation-
- 116 -
a) When going around an inside corner (o > 180")
i) Linear + I.inear ii) Arc + Linear
Programmed path
o,l0
/(\
Programmed
path Tool center
path
b) When going around an outside corner at an obtuse angle (90" <0< Ig0')
Type A i) Linear + Linear ii) Arc + Linear
Programmed path
(o{ 2) /L
o40
Programmed path
/L
Programmed path ..t C
,/ Intersection
,f
Tool center path
- I17 -
c) When going around outside corner at an acute angle (q
an
< 90,)
i) Linear + Linear ii) Arc -> Linear
path
Programmed path a
Programmed
parJr
- ll8 -
* .:i'
F.
F
g
)) Change of offset dlrection in the offset mode
The offset direction is decided by G codes (c41 and G42) for cutter com-
pensation and the sign of offset amount as follows.
(inolo nf nffcor
--t=\ amOUnt +
G code
fn a special case, the offset direction may be changed in the offset mode.
However, the change is not available i-n the start up block and the block
following it. When the offset direction is changed, the conception of inside
and outside disappears to become common for all cases. The offset amount in
the following example i-s assumed to be positive.
/
Programmed path
Programmed
path
Tool center
Path
- il9 -
v) Llhen an intersection is not obtained if offset is normally performed._
and
G42, if intersection with the offset Path is not required, the vector
normal to block B Ls created at the start point of block B.
i) Linear + Linear
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
Programmed
path
Tool center
Path c'
L --'
Programmed path
-120-
iii) Arc + Arc
Block A
(G42)
(G42) /\
rl An arc whose end
point is not on
the alc.
Progtammed
^-
w./ J
path
TooI center
path
\
Center
iv) When the length of tool center path becomes more than a circle because
of cutter comDensation
@Stnopossibi1ityofgeneratingtheabovesitu-
ation. However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was com-
manded with address I, J, and K the above situation can oecur.
a
Programmed
path
Tool center
path \ (G42)
N5 c02 c9l x5000 Y-7000;
/ N6 c4l c02 J-5000;
N7 G42 G01 X5000 Y7000:
Y
/D
I In this case, the cutter
/
L' p\
\ compensation is not per-
formed with more than one
circle circumference: an
arc is formed from Pl to
P2 as shown. (Depending
on the circumstances, an
alarm may be displayed due
to the ttlnterference
Check" described 1ater. )
To execute a circle with
more than one ci.rcumf er-
ence, the circle must be
specified in segments.
- 121 -
6) Tennporary offset cancel
rf the commands below are speclfied in the offset mode, a temporary offset
cancel is actuated and thereafter the system will restore the offset mode
automatically.
Refer to 14.3.6(4) Offser cancel and 14.3.6(2) Starr-up, for detalls of these
operati-ons.
a) G2B automatic return to reference point
If G28 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at
the intermediate point, and the offset mode will be automaticallv restored
after the reference point is reached.
If the offset vector remains at the reference point return in such a case
as the current position being the intermediate point, the CNC makes it to
zero for each axis of which reference point return was completed.
G 28 lntermediate point
-5
(G42 G00)
s
Reference point
F
lntermediate poinl
S
-t
(G42 G00)
S
Reference point
-122-
$
A
When cornmanded not irnmediately after G28
lntermediate point
G42 mode)
+---
I
Arc + Linear
(G42 mode)
,/c-ts
-L23-
8) Comrand for tenporary cancelling offset vector
During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programrning) is conrnanded,
the offset vector js teuporarlly cancelled and thereafter offset node is
automaticallY restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from
the intersectirrg point to the coumanded point where offseE vector 1s
canceled. Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the
intersecting point.
Tool center path
S (Intersection) S (In!ersection)
t-4' /-\ L
--r
' -t\
-/\ /
I\ )'- /t
\ssl-
G92 block
N7
(G4l rnode)
N5 G9I G01 X 30O Y7000;
N6 X-3000 Y6000;
N7 G92 X 1000 Y2000;
N8 G90 G01 X 4000 Y8000;
(lJote) SS indicates the polnt where the tool stops twlce ln the single block mode.
-r24-
a) When commandedat start-up
If a block withouL tool novenent is commanded at start-up, the offset
vector is not produced.
G40 c91
N6 X1000.0 Y1000.0;
N7 G4I XO;
N8 Y-1000.0;
N9 Yi000.0 x-:1000.0;
-t25-
However, when the move distance is zeto, even if the block is commanded
singly, tool motion becomes the same as that when more than one block of
without tool movement are commanded, which will be described subsequently.
N7 Nq..
\
Blocks N7 and N8
/N6 are executed here.
(Note) SSS means that tool stops three times by single block operation.
-126-
+'
&,
t!-
P.
fi
*-
Y.
t
Programmed path
(G 42)
N1 tu4z mode)
N2 b.+ ul\ ^.J.,
-t27-
In this case, note that the CNC obtalns an intersection of the tool path
irrespective of whether inner or outer wal1 machinlng ls specified.
t _/ _/
-.
x-/ --/ --/
Tool center path
a+-
c\
--\ -
-- mmed path
--tt\
-\ \
CAz
_r_
(l,J)
-\
-
x
s Tool center path
-_
Programmed path
r 0, J)
- 128 -
11) When the length of the tool center path becomes more than a clrcle.
I
I
,1,/
:r
Programmed ,P2
(G41)
N5 c01 G91 X10000;
N6 c02 J-6000;
N7 c40 c01 x5000 Y5000 r_100J_lo0;
In the above case' the tool center path does not go around a circle but
moves only from point PI to p2 along an arc.
According to under some ci-rcumstance, an alarm may be generated by the
interference check described 1ater. (if lt is ddsired to move a tool
around a circle, a circle must be conrnanded with partitions.)
ll) Cornermovement
When two or more vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves
linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner
movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isnrt
performed and the latter vector is ignored.
-129-
If AVx<AVlimit and AVycAVlimit, the latter vector is ignored. The AVIimit
is set in advance by parameter No. 0557, CRCDL.
If Ehese vectors do not coi-ncide, a move is generated to turn around the
corner. This move belongs to the latter block.
This move belongs to block N7,
thus, the feed rate is equal to
that in block N7
If the block N7 is G00 mode, the
tool is moved at the rapid traverse
rate, while if it is G01, G02, G03,
the tool is moved at the cutting
feed rate.
However, if the path of the next block is semicircular or Eore, the above
function is not performed.
The reason for thia j-s as follows:
P2 P3,P4 P5
/-,
I
\
\
)
Tool
center path
l\/
\-/\--
-130-
12) Interference check
Tool overcutting is called rinterferencet. The interference check funetion
checks for tool overcutting i-n advance. However, all interference can not
be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if
overcutting does not occur.
a) Reference conditions for interference
-s;
:,
c The direction of the tool path is different from that of the program-
med path. (From 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths).
*i:'
o rn addition to the above condition, the angle between the sLart point
and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that
j
between the start point and end point on the prograffred path in
ci-rcular rnachining. (More than lB0 degrees)
t:: Example of condition O
g'
,:i
Programmed
: path
;?;
The directions of these two
paths are quite different
(180" to each other)
Programmed path
1f 1
Example of condition @
/
Tool center oath ,/- -
Programmed
/
Path
I
,,/
t.'
f ,/"ou \
/ I
Center I
(c41)
N5 c01 c9l x8000 Y2000 HOi;
N6 c02 X3200 Y-r600 r-2000 J-8000 H02;
N7 cOl x2000 Y-5000;
(Offset value corresponding to H01 : r-1 = 2000)
(Offset value corresponding to H02 : t2 - 6000)
In the above example, the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant.
But after cutter compensation, the arc is placed in the four quadrants.
b) Correction of interference in advance
O Removal of the vector causing the interference
When cutter radj-us compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and
vectors Vl, YZ, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5 , V6, V7 and
V6 between B and C are produced, the nearest veccors are checked
first. If interference occurs, they are ignored. But if the vectors
to be i-gnored Cue to interference are the last vectors at the corner,
they cbnnot be ignored.
Interference check
between vectors V6 and Vc -- Interfere V4 and V5 are ignored
Check
between V3 and VU Interference Ignored
Check
between V2 and V7 Interference - Ignored
Check between V 1 and Ve Interfere - Cannot be lgnored
If, whl1e checking, a vector wlth no interference is detected, sub-
sequent vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular movement, a
Ij-near movement 1s produced
- if the vectors are interfered.
-132-
( Exarnp le I) The tool Floves li-nearlv
c--/ c
Tool nose
center path \
Programmed
path
I
I V4, V5 : Interference
\
I
I
l V3 , V6: Interference
\ Y2,Y1 Interference
I I V1 , Vs: No interfere
If the tool is stopped by \
single block operation at
block A, the tool center \
\ I
i
moves to Vr.
or O2
(Example 2) The tool moves linearly as fo11 ows:
T'ooI path: V r +VZ+V7+ Vg
su,
v2
L L
vl
!l
v6,
Tool nose
center path
I'if--- \C
Programmed path
-133-
@ If the interference occurs after correction O , the tool is stopped
wi-th an alarm.
If the interference occurs after correction O or if there are only
one pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors
interfere, the alarm (No.41) is displayed and the tool is stopped
jmmediately after execution of the preceding block. (If the block is
executed by the single block operatj-on, the tool is stopped at the end
of the block.)
Tool nose center path Stopped
v2, v5 : Interference
v1,v6: Interference
-134-
O Groove which is smaller than the offset value
Programme<1 path Tool center path
Stop
D2
NTDI
operaLlon
VB
\'
;\
When points Po, Po and P" are programmed j-n an absolute command, the tool is
stopped by thb single block function after executing the block from P^ to
Pp and the tool is moved by MDI operation. Vectors V-, and V-. ^are
t?anslated to V'-, and V'-^ and offset vectors are recal3illated fBi the
vectors V^, ana 4,t^ betweenbflock p--p^ and p^-p*.
However,
t"lrr"" lr3"tto, Vo, is not scalucutatef, afain, compensation is accu-
rately performed from po{n-t P".
I 4 ) Manual operat i.on
For manual operation during the cutter compensatlon, refer to item III-4.5.
- 135 -
15) If the tool leneth compensation is executed during cutter compensation, the
compensatlon amJunt of the cutter is regarded to be changed.
16) General precautions on offset
a) Offset value command
The offset value is cornmanded by a H code which specifies an offset value
number.
Once eomnanded, a H code rematns valld until another H code is commanded
or cleared.
In addltion to specifying the offset value for cutter compensation, the H
code ls also used to command offset value for tool offset.
b) Changing the offset value
In general, the offset value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when
changing tools. If the offset value is changed in offset mode, the
vector at the end point of the block is calculated for the new offset
value.
Calculated from offset
value in block 6.
- 136 -
d) Overcutting by cutter compensation
i) Machining an inside corner at a radius smaller than the cutter radius
hthen the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because
the inner offsetting of the cutter: will result in overcdttings, an
alarm is generated and the NC stops at the start of the block. In
single block operation, the overcutting is generated because the tool
is stopped after the block execution.
Tool center path
An alarm is Senerated
and the operation stops
Programmed path
An alarm is generated
and the operation stops here
in single block operation.
Programmed
{
Z*\
- 137 -
iii) When machining a step smaller than the tool radius
When machlning of the step is commanded by circular machlning in the
case of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius, the
path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to
the programmed dj-rection. In this case, the first vector is ignored,
and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single
block operation is stopped at this point. If the machining is not in
the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued. If the step
is of linear, no alarru wil1.be generated and cut correctly. However
uncut part will remain.
Linear movemenl
Prosrammed path
Circular -. _
CEntor of circular machining
iv) Ttre start up and the movement in Z axts on the cutter compensation C
It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z
axi-s after the cutter compensation is effected at some distance from
the workpiece at the start of the machining.
In the case above, if it is desired to divide the uotj-on along the Z
axi-s into rapid trave.rse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below.
Nl c9t c00 c41 x50000 Y50000 Hl;
N3 G01 2-30000 Fi;
N6 Yi00000 F2; N6: Offset mode
- 138 -
Then, if the block N3 (move comrnand
in Z axis) is divided as follows:
I N3, N5; lvlove
I command in Z ads.
Nl c9l c00 c4l x50000 Y50000 Hl;
N3 Z-25000i --r
N5 cOl 2-5000 Fl:r
N6 Y100000 F2;
As there are two move command blocks not included in the selected
plane and the block N6 cannot be entered into the buffer storage, the
tool center path is calculated by the information of NI in the fi-gure
above. That is, the offset vector is not calculated in start up and
the overcutting may result.
The above example should be modified as follow:
The move command in the same direction as that of the move command
after the motion in Z axis should be programmsd.
Nl c9l c00 c41 x50000 Y40000 Hl;
N2 Y10000;
N3 2-25000;
N5 cOl 2-5000 FI;
N6 Yi00000 F2; N6
When executing the block Nl, the blocks N2 and N3 are entered into the
buffer storage and the correct comDensation is performed by the re-
lationship between Nl and N2.
- rJ'-{ -
14.4 Changing of Tool Offset Amount (programmable data input) (G10)
The offsec amount, which are used in tool length offset and cutter compensation,
can be set by G10 command in programming. The command format. is as follows.
G1OP R t
P: OffseT number
R: 0ffset amount
The offset amount is absolute or incremental depending on the G90 or G9l
respectively
14.5 Scaling (G50, c51)
Pa P3
\.Po' Pe'
l-T
l,'t1t: -l-
,/ P!' P2'- --
-140-
---\ I
l12 scalng
o L)l
(Note l) Specify G51 in an independent block. Cancel G5I by G50 without fail
after scaling.
(Note 2) The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
(Note 3) If a setting value is employed as a scale factor r^rithout specifying P,
the setting value at G5l courmand time is employed as the scale factor,
and a change of this value by another command, if anlr is noL
effective.
(Note 4) Whether the scaling function is effective or not, it can be set by a
n'rtmprer for each axis. The scaling function always becomes effecti-ve
for the clrcular radius coruoand R in the G5l mode, irrespecti-ve of
these parameters.
(Note 5) Scaling is not effective for manual operation, but is effeeLive for
the tape, memory, or MDI operations.
(Note 6) Scaling is not applicable to the followi-ng movement in case of the
canned cycle Z-axj-s movement
* Cutting depth Q and return relief of deep hole cycle (G83, G73).
x X, Y shift quantity in fine boring (c76) and back boring (c87).
(Note 7) Specify G27, G28, G29, c30, and G92 in G50 mode wiChout fail.
(Note 8) If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as
a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In
chis a case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and
therefore, it may affect the cutter movement by cutter compensation C.
14.6 Coordinate System Rotation (c68, Gj9]_.
A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible,
for example, to modify a program using a rotation command when a workpiece has
been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position on the machine.
Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the
posi-tions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length
of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling
it after rotation.
- l4i -
Center of
rotation
t
,i
,/
(a,0)
-r42-
The rotation plane depends on the plane (G17, Gl8, Gl9) selected when G68 is
designated. Gl7, GIB or Gl9 is not required to be designated in the same block
as G6B.
When o and B are omitted, the position where G68 is commanded is Set as the
center of rotation.
As for the incremental commands up to an absolute position command' following a
G68 cornmand, it is assumed that the rotary center were not specified (the point
where G68 was commanded is the center of rotation).
When R is omitted, the value set to parameter is regarded as the angle.
The coordinate system rotatj-on is cancelled by G69;
G69 may be designated in the same block as the other commands.
Tool offset, such as cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or tool
offset, is performed after t.he coordinate sysLem is rotated fo? the command
p rogram.
As for the incremental position commands designated between the G68 block and a
block with an absolute comnand; it is regarded that the center of rotation is
not designated (that is, it is regarded that the point where G68 was designated
is the center of rotation).
(Note l) When a value with a decimal point is designated for R, the position of
the decimal point becomes the unit of angle.
(Note 2) If a movement command is specified with G69, the following lncremental
command does not move the tool in the incremental motion.
(Exarnple I )
Nl c92 X-5000 Y-5000 G69 G17; a/-\ Tuol palh whn rhe incremnrdt
N2 c68 G90 X7000 Y3000 R60.000; .\
\
/ comnd s desrtsnated in the \l
blk rm parenlhcsis)
N3 c90 GOl x0 Y0 F200; \ Origimlly programm.d
(c9r xs000 Y5000) / _
tool palh
Center 0f
.otalion
I (7000,3000)
(-5000, -5000)
(Note 3) Do not change the plane selection in the G68 mode (command Gl7, G18 or
G19 in the G69.mode).
-I43-
14.6.2 Relationship to other functions
l) Cutter ComPensation C
IE is possible to specify G68 and G69 wit.hin cutter compensation C. The
rotation plane must coi.ncide with the plane of cutter comDensation C.
(Exarnple 2)
NI G92 XO YO G69 GOI;
N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 Fi000 H01
N3 G68 R-30000;
N4 G9 I X2000;
N5 G03 Y1000 r-1000 J500:
N6 G01 X-2000;
N7 Y-1000;
N8 c69 G40 c90 X0 Y0 M30:
\
\*)r- hogrammed shape before
coordinate s),stem rotation
(0, 0)
Tool path
-r44-
i@ Repetitive Commands
It is possible to store one Program as a subprogram and recall the subprogram
by changing the angIe.
(Exaurple 4) Setting the parameter RIN (No. 4I ) to I
G92 X0 Y0 G69 Gi7:
GOl F200 H01;
M98 P2100;
I"198 P072200 L7;
c00 c90 x0 Y0 M30;
o 2200 G68 X0 Y0 c9l R45.0;
c9o M98 P2r00;
MqQ.
(
I
When offset is
I
not applied
I
I I wn.n offset is
awned
I {
I
\l
\_-_ l___ _ _J
S$b-!loSB$r
f-
-146-
(Example 2)
( Cut ter compensation cancel)
G51 ..; (Scaling mode)
c68 ..; (Coordinate system rotation 0N)
(Example 3)
G92XOYO;
c5 1X3000Y1500P500;
c68x2000Y I 000R45000 ;
c01x4000Y1000.
Y1000;
X-2000;
Y-i000;
x2000;
When only coordinate system
rotation is applied.
/
-r7-z'B'
- -1 When only scaling
/l is applied.
-145-
Actual motion
Motion without
skip signal
Skip signal is
input here.
\\4' s (3oo,1oo)
t'\t-// 1"
\//
L<:- - u',
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom nacro because they are stored in the custom mrcro system variable
#5061 to /15064, as follows:
#5061 . X axis coordinate value
1t5062 . Y axis coordlnate value
115063 . Z axls coordinate value
115064 4th axis coordinate value
The skip functlon can be used when the movement distance is not known as in
the standard-size feed in grinders.
Refer to the manualg published by the machine tool bullder.
(Note 1) If G3t comnand is issued while cutter compensation C is applied, an
alarm is displayed. Cancel the cutter compensation with the G40 com-
mand before the G31 comrnand is specified.
(Note 2) Dry run, override and automatlc acceleration/deceleration are in_
effective for skip function. However, it is possible to make effective
them by parameter setting (SKPF, parameter No. 0015)
-r4B-
15. MEASUREMENT FUNCTTONS
Actuai motion
Skip signal is \
5 0.0 Motion without
skip signal
\ \ .\
-=\- 100.0
--
2) When the next bl-ock is an absolute command with only one axis specified:
The specified axis moves to the commanded position. The axi-s which was not
specified remains at the position when the skip signal is input.
(Example) c31c90X200.0Fr00;
YI 00.0;
I
Actual motion
Motion without
skip signal
Skip signal is
irput here.
A 6x = zoo.or
3) lihen the next block is an absolute cornmand with t\^'o axes specif ied:
The tool moves to the posiEion specified by next block even if the skip
signal is input.
(lixample) C31C90X200.0F100;
x300.0Y100.0;
-r47-
16,1 Custom Macro Command
The custom macro command is the command to call the custom macro body.
Custom macro or subprogram can be called by the following commands.
- r50 -
s
re,.
Gt
Gr
&:.
*g
1
&
g
16. CUSTOM MACRO A
il
ti
Request
li Machine tools builders are requested to attach your custom macro program tape
or program list to the CNC unit without fai1.
i If. it is necessary to replace part program. storage memory due to a failure,
: FANUC sert'icemen or end users operators in charge of maintenance should know
i the contents of custom ruacro for the purp-o-56-oTElTiring the trouble immedi-
ately.
A group of instructions
for a certain function
Custom macro
instruction
-r49-
Table 16.1.5 (b) correspondence between group number of G code and variabre
numbers
//8I00rs variables are flags to indicaEe whetehr an argument has been speci f ied
or not every call. These variables are I if an argument is specified, and 0 if
no argumenE is specified.
#8000's variables show a specified value, if an argument is specified. However,
they become as specified below, j-f no argument is specified.
i) Reference in NC command
The address itself is neglected.
2) Reference in macro command (G65 block)
This value is undefined. Use it after confirming 8f00's numbers.
If plural G codes are specified a arguments in the same block, a value is input
to variables in each group as shovrn in Table L6.1 .2 (b). In rhis case, /18010 is
the smallest group nuuber out of the numbers specified at a time. No value can
institute into //8100's and 8000f s variables.
-L52-
16.1.5 Argument specification
An argument means an actual value given to a variable employed in a salled
llldLr V. ^- 4!^-^"ment
dll 5u can be specified at all addresses employable'in this CNC
except for 0. The format of argument specification is f-he same as in normal CNC
command. The llmitation at each address as a normal CNC command, such as
decimal point, sign, maximum number of digits, etc., is also applicable t.o the
format. The following table indicates the correspondence between argument
specification addresses and variable numbers.
Table 16.1.5 (a) Correspondence between addresses and variable numbers
#8006 #8 106 K
#800 9 #8 109 -f
#80 r0 #8i10
#80rr #8llt H
#8013 #81 l3 M
#80r4 #8r14 N
#80r6 #8rl6 P
#8017 #81i7 a
#8018 #8IIB R
#8019 #8rl9 J
#8020 #8120 T
{t8024 tt8l24
#80 25 #8125 I
tf 8026 {t8r26 Z
- l5l -
16.22 Kind of variables
Variables are sort.ed into conmon vari-ab1es and system
variable_s according to
variab1enumbers,andtheiram;,,d"h'...i:.'"romeachother.
1) Common variable //100 to ilt49 and //SO0 to ii 531
Common variables are cornmon to main programs and each macro
called from these
main programs. That is, i/i in a macro is equal to /li in another macro.
Common variables //L00 co--_il_I49 are cleared when the power is turned off, and
reset to "0" jusr after por6Fw66 turned on. Cbninon v-arial tEslSOO ro rI53l
"jg_,r'-ot-
clea:9{,= _:ygl _ i{"."._poy_er is turned ,- of f ,-- and - thJii--vaiu-eF:-ena-in
unchanged
2) 51'stem variable
The system variables are defined as variables whose appllcati-ons remain
f ixed
a) Tool of f set amounr #L - 1199, IIZOOO - llZ2OO
The offset amount can be known by reading system variable //l to ll99 values
for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by substituting
them into system variables llL to 1199. Among these offset numbers I to 99,
those which are not used as offset amounts can be treated as hold tvDe
cofftron variables (#500 to ilS:t) .
The system variables il200L to ll22O0 correspond to the tool offset numbers
1 to 200. They can be read and substituted as the same as /ll to 1199.
b) Inrerface inpur signals i/1000 to /ll0I5, llLo3z
Interface input signals can be known, by reading system variables //1000 to
#1015 for reading interface signals.
DI UI ":
I5 UI14 UI13 UI I2 UI1 1 UIlO UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UIC
Contact opened 0
By readi.ng system variable lt1032, all the lnput signals can be read at
once.
l5
tt'L032: L /t(i000 -f t) x I^1
i=0
(Note I) No .r"1rl. can be substituted into system bariables #1000 to llL032.
(Note 2) System variables #1000 ro i/tOt5 can be <iisplayed by diagnostic
f uncti-on.
DGNOS No. i10 UlO to Ul7
DGNOS No. lll Ul8 to Ul5
(Note 3) System variables i/1000 to llLO32 can be used only when FANUC PMC
is comblned.
-154-
e
ss
3
L
16.2 Custom Macro Body
]n the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary ala command
variables, calculation, and branch command can be used.
The custom macro body starts from the program No. which irunediately follows 0
and ends at M99.
0 De^^e^..
r rl^
, rvSr4ur rrv.
c6EoT-. . . , Calculation command
G90c00x/r 10 r t CNC command using variables
16.2.1 Variables
Instead of dj,rectly providing a numeral to an address in the macro, a variable
can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying the
calculated variable when calling t,he macro or when executj-ng the macro itself.
Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable numbers.
I ) How te-exol:ss--lari-ables-
Variables are exPressed by variable numbers following /l as shor^m below.
ll_i (i = l, 2, 3, 4 ...... )
(Exarnple) !!5, tJQ-- #199:-
2) How to quote variables
A numeral following an address can be repraced by a variable.
Assume that <Address> //i or <Address> - /li is programmed, and it means that
the variable value or its complement serves as the tommand value of the
address.
(Example)
: ]'i-fl?3:: il:i::::: :H: ;:;,;';":"Hilfi":n;il"11'li,J I'i,0.
. "G it139" indicates that G3 was commanded when /1130 = 3.
When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as
tt//ill00tt, for example, but expressed astt//9100". That is, rrgtr
rr.*t to ttlftj
indicates the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be
rep laced.
(Example) If*/i 10O--=_._!_Q5- and /1105 = -500 , "Xi/9100" indicates that X-500 r^ras
commanded, and "X-/19100" indicaCes that X500 \4ras conrmandJ.".
g"
(Note 1) No variable can be quoted at address 0 and N. Neither 0#100 nor N//120
can be programured.
(trtote 2) IT-Is not possible to command a value exceeding the maxi-mum comnand
value set in each address. When #30 = I20, M/130 has exceeded the
maximum command value.
-r53-
e) Number of necessary parts, number of machined parts
It is possible to read and substitute the number of necessary parts and
number of machined parts by use of system variables.
(Note l) The unit will be the one being used when .the command is given.
C) Position information //5001 to /15083
The position information can be known by reading system variables ii500I to
#5083. The unit of position information is.0.001 mm in metric input and
0.000I inch in inch input.
- 156 -
c) Interf ace ourpur signals //t tOO to /l lll5, #t132, #I133
A value can be substituted into system variables #1100 to #1 1 l5 for
sending the interface signals.
.,
2r5 214 213 212 2Lt I 10
1n
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 2' 2' 2"
DO J0l5 uo14 uol 3 u0l2 u01 1 uol0 uo9 uo8 u07 u06 u05 u04 uo3 u02 u01 uoc
r-v
(Note 4) If any other number than '0' or ' I ' is subsEituted into system
variables #1100 to /ll1l5, it is treated as 'l'.
(Note 5) It is possible to read the values of sysrem variables /llt00 ro /lll33.
(Note 6) System variables /lll00 to #1115 and #1133 can be displayed by
diagnostic function.
DGNOS No. 126 UOO to UO7 No. 127 U08 to UOl5
No. 196 U0100 ro u0107 No. 197 u0108 ro U0ll5
No. I98 U0116 ro U0123 No. 199 UOl24 ro UOl3l
(Note 7) System variables #1f00 to llll3z can be used only when FANUC PMC is
combined.
-155-
(Meaning) i/i = ttj @ #k
I
Operator ( Speci f ied Hm)
(Exanple) p/l100 Q#l0l Rii 102 # 100 = //l0I + # t02
P# i00 Q/i l0 r RI5 #r00 = //l0l + I5
P# IOO Q-100 R/i 102 # 100 = -100 + l!r02
P# 100 Qr 20 R-50 # 100 = 120 + en
-JU
P# 100 Q-# l0 I R/i i 02 /r I00 = -/1101 + tno2
(Note I) No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meanlng
of each vaLue is the same as that designated without decimal point when
quoted in each address.
(Examp le) /1100 = i0
X#100 0.01 mm (metric input)
(Note 2) Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree, and the least
input increment is 1/1000 degree.
(Example) 100 0,1"
(Note 3) H code specified by G65 does not affect any selection of offset amount
-158-
Q\/cl-pm
rl ev-"'
Position information
Re:d'ino Cutter and tool
variab 1e while moving length compensation
#500 I Rl ne k end nni nl- n^q'i f i nn nf Possible Not considered.
X axis (ABSI0) Position of tool
115002 Block end point position of nose (program com-
Y awi q mand position)
#500 3 Block end point position of
#5004 Block end point position of
4th axis
It502L X axis coordinate position Impossible Considered.
tf 5022 Y axis coordinate posi.tion Position of tool
#5023 Z axis coordinate position roForanoo nninl-
{t5024 4th axis coordinate oosition (Machine coordinate)
(Note !.)It is not possible to substitute any value into system variabtes /lS00l
ro /15083.
(Note o\ When the skip signal doesn't turn on, the skip signal position is the
end point of that block.
16.2.3 Macro instructions (G65)
Generar I orm
G65 Hm e/i i qili n/ik;
m Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99.
tti Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded.
ltj Variable name I to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
Itk Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
-r57-
h) Exclusive 0R /fi = //j .xoR. #k
G6s H13 P#i Q/ij Rifk;
(Ex.) c65 Hl3 P#l0l Q/i102 R#103; (#I0l = ttroT .XOR. #i03)
r) Square root /ii = /#j
G65 H21 P/l j. Q//j;
(Ex.) c6s H21 p/ll0r Q/i102; (#l0r = /#ro2)
j) nUsolute value /i i = l#j I
n)
rt Combined square root 2 11i = /142 - 1S1rz
G65 H2B r/ll Q//5 ni/k;
(Ex. ) c65 H28 p//r01 Q//102 R//103; (/i 101 = /llL022 - llLnz
1l Sine //i = //j . SIN (i/k) (degree unir)
c65 H3r P#i q/li n/lk;
(Ex.) G65 H31 p//r0r Q//r02 R//r03; (#r0L = llro2 SrN (#103))
r) Cosine lti = lli COS (#k) (degree unit)
G65 H32 e//i qi/t n//r;
(Ex. ) c65 H32 p//r01 Q/i 102 R//103; (/lr0r = llr02 cos (#103) )
- 160 -
._."_*4$ry
tr
H32 Co sine tli = ,,J
ll: . nnc
vvu
(il1,\
vN/,
It
H33 Tangent ttj- = ltj . TAN (//k)
tl
H34 Arctangent /ii = ArAN (tti/#k)
tl
H80 Unconditional divergence G0T0n
H8i Conditional divereence 1 IF i/j = llk, GO TO n
tl
H82 Conditional divergence 2 rF #j + lfk, Go TO n
!l
H83 Conditional di.vergence 3 rF //j > {lk, Go ro n
It
H84 Conditional divergence 4 rF #j < llk, G0 TO n
H85 Conditional divergence 5 rF /ij z /ik, GO TO n
-i59-
2) Control command
a) Unconditional branch
G65 HBO Pn; n: Sequence number
(Ex. ) c65 H80 PI20; (Diverge ro Nl20)
b) Conditional divergence I ilj EQ. #k (=)
G65 H81 Pn Q/lj n/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H8l Pr000 Q/ll0l R/ti02;
/lI0l = llt02, go ro N1000
#t0l I lll02, go ro nexr
Conditional divergence 2 //j . NE . #k (l)
c65 H82 Pn Q//j R/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H82 P1000 Qillol R//102;
IIIOL + llT02, go ro Nt000
lll0l = lllo2, go ro nexr
d) Conditi-onal divergence 3 ilj cT //k (>)
c65 H83 Pn Qilj n/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H83 Pr000 Qllr0l R//102;
/1101 > ltLO2, go ro N1000
# I01 < ltLO2, go to nexr
Conditional divergence 4 /lj LT /lk (<)
_q05--H9-4 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H84 P1000 Q#lOi n/1102;
#i0I < llL02, go ro N1000
#101 Z llL02, go ro nexr
- 16l -
16.2.4 Notes on custom macro
l) How to input "//"
when l#l key is depressed af ter address G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S,
T, P or Q, i/ code is input.
2) It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the I'IDI mode. However,
address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation.
3) Addresses H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after
G65. Address 0 and N only are writable before G65.
4) Single block
Generaliy, the macro instruction block does nor stop even if single block
stop is turned on. However, by setting parameter SBKM of parameter No. 0011,
it is possible to make single block effective. This is used for macro
testing.
5) Variable values can be taken within a range of -232 to 232-t, but they are
not displayed correctly, except for -99999999 to 99999999. If they exceed
the above range, they are displayed as *ti*?k****.
6) it is possible to nest subprograms up to four tj-mes.
7) Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the opera-
ti,on results with decirnal numbers, the figures below decinal point truncated,
if an arithmetic result contains a fractj-on part.
Particularly be carful with the arithmetic sequence, accordingly.
(Ex.) When /1100 = 35, /ll0l = I0, lllo2 = 5 the followlngs results.
//110 = /1100 + /lI0l (= 3)
#l1l = #110 x #102 (= 15)
llr20 = i/100 x /i I02 (: I75)
ItL2I = //120 + /i101 (= tl)
/tI11 = 15 ard lf L2I = 17
8) The execution time of macro instruction differs according to varj-ous condi-
tions (for example, if the axis is under movement or not). It may be several
Eens msec. on an average.
9) When a custom macro is loaded from a paper tape in the EIA code, '&' code is
treated as t'//tt, because there is in no "//t' code in the EIA code.
-162-
Examples of Custom Macro
Reference
point (X6, Ye)
(n- I )th hole
\ Present position
X,,,U-U
Yn : Coordinate values at the reference point of bolt hole circle.
r : Radius
a : Starting angle
n : Number of holes I
The following variables are used:
#500 X coordinate value at reference point (Xo)
ii 50r Y coordinate value at reference point (Yn)
{t502 Radius (r)
#503- Starting angle (a)
Itso4 Number of holes (n)
However, when n > 0, counterclockwise (n pieces)
when n < 3, clockwise (-n pieces)
The following are used as r.rorks in custom macro:
#f00 : Counter showing the drilling of the i-th hole in progress (i)
#10r Last value of counter (= l"ll (ie)
ItLO2 Angle of the i-th circle (ei)
#t03 X axis value of rhe i-ch hole (Xi)
It LOA Y axis value of the l-th hole (ti)
-163-
Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows:
o90 t0;
N100 c65 HOr P//100 Q0: {-n
I_U
c6s H22 P/t101 Qitsoa; ie = l"l
N200 G65 H04 P//102 Q//100 R360000;
G65 H05 PllLO2 Q/i 102 R/i504; I .360o x 1
tJ].=at-
G65 H02 Plfr}z Q#s03 Rillo2 i I n
G65 H32 P//103 Qll502 R/1r02;
c6s Ho2 P/1103 Q/1500 Ri/r03;
I
)
Xi=Xo*rCOS (ei)
c65 H31 P/1r04 Q/1s02 R/1i02; 'l
Yi=Yo+rSIN(0i)
c6s H02 Pillo4 Q/1s01 R#104 t )
G90 H00 x#r03 Y/1104; Positioning to the i-t.h hole
M10; Output of hole machining M code
c6s H02 P# 100 Q// 100 Rl ; r - lr l-
c6s H84 P-200 Q#100 R/li0r; Wheni<ie,branches to N200 to dri1l
ie pieces of holes
M99;
The program to call thls custom macro, for example, will be as follows:
o00 r0;
G65 H01 P#500 Q100000; Xn = 100 nrm
G65 HOl P#50I Q-200000; Yo = -200 mm
c65 HOI Plt502 Q100000; r = 100 nm
G65 Hol P/1503 Q20000 i a= 20"
c65 H01 P//504 Q12; Counrerelockwise (n = t2)
c92 X0 Y0 Z0
lI98 P9010' Custom rnacro call
;0" ;6f .r
M02;
i1500to i/504 can also be set by MDI operation.
rn this case, blocks with G65 of the above program are not necessary
16.3.2 Pocket machining
A pocket milling cycle to machine the area illustrated below can be programmed
by custom macro. Area cutting is done with a certain depth and another area
cutting is done after the tool is cut-in along the Z axis.
Rapid traverse
FeedrateSxe
Feed r3le e or f
(e : Z direction
f : XY plane)
Starting point (x, y) r z
---r--
I
I
I I
I
lil
lii
"l
-164-
Respect ive variables mean as follows:
#500 X axis absolute coordinate value at left lower part of pocket,
starting point (x).
#50 I Y axls absoluLe coordinate value at left lower part of pocket,
starting point (V).
11502 Z point absolute coordinate value (z)
#503 R point absolute coordinate value (r)
lls04 Cutting quantity at one time (q), positive number
/150s Length of X axis direction in area (i), positive number
{t506 Length of Y axis direction in area (j), posltive number
11507 Finishing margin (k)
#s08 tZ when machining width is set to cutter diameter x tZ
# 509 TooI radius (d)
#s l0 Feed rate in XY plane (f)
#51 r Feed rate in Z axis (e)
Tool is fed at a rate of 8 x e until it reaehes I mm before the starting point
of cutting.
/1100 to i1113: Used as a work for calculations.
Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows:
09020;
c6s H02 P#100 Q#s09 R/1507;
c65 H04 PltLO2 Q#509 R2;
c65 H26 Pllro2 Q#508 R100;
c6s H02 PllLO2 Qi/102 Rl;
c65 H02 P#103 Q/1s00 R//100;
c65 H02 PllLO4 Q//s01 R//r00;
c6s H02 P//10s Q//s00 R//505;
c65 H02 P//105 Q//10s Riir00;
c6s H02 P/1r06 Q//s01 R//506;
c6s H03 P#106 Qil106 R/i100;
c6s H02 PitLOT Qilso2 R/1507;
c 90 c00 x/l 103 Yil i 04 ;
z{1503;
c65 H0l P//108 Q//503;
N 100 c6s H03 P# 108 Q# 108 Rit5 04 ;
c65 H85 P110 Q#108 Ri/107;
c6s H01 P#108 Qi/107;
Nl10 c0l zllIoS F/t511;
xlll0s F//510;
c65 H01 P#109 Ql;
N 120 G6s H04 P# I 10 Q# 109 R/l 102 ;
c65 H02 P/tl l0 Q/t110 R//r04;
c6s H86 Pr 30 Q# r l0 Ril i 06 ;
c6s H01 P#1 t0 Q// r06 ;
N 130 Y/l l 10;
c65 H23 Pil I I I Qil109 R2 ;
G65 H8l Pt40 Q#l ir R0;
x//r03;
c65 H80 P150;
N 140 xi/ 105 ;
Nl50 c65 n02 P#i09 Q#109 Rr;
c6s H84 P-120 Q#l r0 R/l106;
c00 zll503;
x// 103 Yil r 04 ;
c6s H86 P200 Q//108 u/107;
c65 Ho2 PlltL2 Q/lr08 Rl000;
c6s H04 P#t 13 Q//s l r R8;
c0l zllLr2 Filrl3;
c65 H80 P-100;
N200 M99;
-165-
16.3.3 Interface signal
Read signed BCD 3 digirs by address swirching ln //100.
Structure of DI
zB 27 26 25 24 23 22 2r 20
u
Address send signal
N10 c65 H8l P10 Q//10r3 R0; I^/aiting for data send
G65 P#r00 Q//r032 R4095;
HT2 BCD 3 digits read
c65 H24 P//r00 Q//100; Conversion into binary number
c65 H8l P20 Q/11012 R0; l Addition of sign
c65 H01 00 Q-/1100; I
P// r
N20 c65 HI2 Pltrr3z Q//1132 R495; Address send signal OFF
MQQ.
-166-
16.3.4 Shearing machine
I
X axis
+ _--- I
I
I
I
Cutter
Workpiece
-167-
Common variable employed:
i1501 =X
ll5o2 = Y
//505 = r
//506 = e
{1507 = Sequence number at the call cOmrnand
#Ilo, //Ill, llrr2, /1120 = I,trork
01000 G90; Absolute command
c66 P8000; 08000 is called every block in nodal cal,1 rnode.
Nlr00 c92 X0 Y0 z0; Coordinate system setting
(X, Y, Z) = (0, 0, 0) Point O
(r, e, Z) = (0,90.000,0)
N1200 s2000 M03 T02;
NI300 G00;
NI400 xl00.0 Y100.0; (X, Y) = (100.0, 100.0) poinr
(r, e) = (141.42I, 45.000)
N1500 x200.0 Y-200.0; (X, Y) = (200.0, -200.0) point
(r, e) = (282.842, -45.000)
N1600 x0 Y-I00.0; (X, Y) = (0, -100.0) poinr
(r, ) - (100.0, -90.000)
N2000 c04 P1000; hrell I sec.
lm.0
-168-
16.4 Pattern Data Input Function
-169-
l'lacro i-nstruction
c65 H90P p Q q R TJ
UJNKi
H90 : Specifies the menu ri_11e
p : Assuure a, and a, be the codes of characters C, and C^,
L Z'
P=atx1O3+a,
p CCO OOO
-L Code a, of character c.
Code a, of character C
L
I
See 16.7.3 for character codes.
, =;";";r-;.t'0^"-
k , A=".*l f.,' and 0" rhe codes of characrers c.. and'"12'
n
? "'",
^. rr
t="lrxl0'*^I2
(Example) Assume that the rnenu title is "HOLE PATTERN", and the macro
instruction is given as follows.
c6s H90 Po72 079 Q076 069 R032 080 1065 084 J0B4 o0g K082
078 ;
HOLEL_IP ATTERN
For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item i6.8.3.
2) Macroinstruction to clescribe pattern name
Pattern name
ct t3 f to tg tg tto
'z
cl' c2 "" '4
cto
'l
Characters of pattern nane (10 characters)
L1acro ins truct ion
G65 Ii91 P n a qRrI iJiK
H91 Specifies the pattern name
n Specif ies the menu number of pattern name (n = I to I0)
Y Assume a, ., be the codes of characters C., and C,r,
"lO
'q=atxl0-*a,
r Assume aa and ar, be the codes of characters C, and CO,
J^a
.=t3xl0-+aO 1
- 170 -
(Example) Assume that the pattern name of menu No. I is "BOLT HOLE", and the
macro instructlon ls glven by;
G65 H9t pl Q066 079 R076 084 1032 072 JO79 076 K069 032 t
BOLTLJHO LEL-l
(Note) If a part of characters are not specified by P, Q, R, I, J or K which
designace character strings, but they are omitEed, the characters (two
characters) at that part are regarded as space characters.
3) Pattern number selection
Enter a desired pattern number by keying operation from the pattern nenu CRT
as fo11ows, for example.
Etr
The selected pattern number is set to system variable "//5900". The custou
macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program
(external program number search) with an external signal and then, referring
to system variable #5900 by the program.
4) Menu title: Example of custom mrcro to describe pattern names
09500;
Nl c65 H90 P072 079 Q076 059 R032 080
1065 084 J084 069 K082 078; HOLE PATTERN
N2 c65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084
T032 072 J079 076 K069 032: i. BOLT HOLE
N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068; 2. GRID
N4 c65 H9l P3 Q076 073 R078 069
1032 065 J078 071 K076 069; 3. LINE ANGLE
Ns c65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080
1073 078 J071 032; 4. TAPPING
N6 C65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076
T076 473 J078 071; 5. DRILLING
I
N7 c65 H91 P6 Q066 079 R082 073
1078 07 1; 6. BORING
N8 c65 H91 P7 Q0B0 079 R067 07s
1069 084; 7. POCKET
N9 c65 H9i P8 Q080 069 RO67 075; 8. PECK
N10 c65 H9i P9 Q084 069 R083 084; q TEST
Nit c65 H91 PrO Q066 065 R067 075; IO. BACK
Nl2 M99;
- 171 -
16.4.2 Pattern data display
When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are displayed
- 172 -
(Example) Assume that the pattern data
title 1s ,,BOLT HOLE", and the maero
instruction is given by;
c6s Hez t99_q gp Q076 084 R032 072 r07s 076
B o L r L__,- H o f -f ! 032 ,
J06e
2) Macro instruction to describe varlable name i-_l-
L-
Variable name
t, t, t, au ,-, ag a,
Cl'
',C2...- Cl0
'o t Variable a,.
o
name (10 characters)
Macro instruction
G65H93P n Qe r r n i J j
He3 : sp.lfri!" tllGri"rfGur" K
- r74 -
16.4.3 Character.to-codes correspondence table
- 175 -
Subprograms employed in pattern data input function
- 176 -
17- CUSTOM MACRO B
Request:
Machine tools builders: You are requested to attach your custom macro
program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fail.
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory due to a failure,
FANUC servicemen or end user operators in charge of maintenance should know
the contents of your custom macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble
immediately.
A group of instructions
for a certain function
- r77 -
)
G55P9011A101s: (
X=l Z = 4:
I ()
I
I
l
l )/'
i
This enables the user to improve the CNC performance by themselves. Custom
macro bodies may be cprovided by the machine tool builder, but they can be
created by users, EOO.
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be rnade easily'.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programned and registered,
the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting function.
Programmers can use the bolt hole circle functj.on by using the following command
only:
c65P Pr.R t A o B B k ;
r Macro number "
of Em-hole circle
r Radius
Start angle
li Angle between circles
k Number of circles
-r78-
Address of the argument assignment I Variable ln custom macro body
#19
T #20
U #21
V #22
In 1t zJ
#24
I #25
Z #26
b) Argument assignment II
ABCIJKIJ
In addition to the fact that arguments can be addresses A, B, and
C, a maximum of ten sets of arguments can be -ssigGE--in
set for addresses I, J and K.
When several numbers are assigned in the same address, they must be assigned
in the determined sequence.
Addresses not requj-red can be omitted.
Addresses assigned jn argument assignment II and the number of the variable
used in the macro corresDond as follows:
lt L
B 1rL
1tJ
r1
Jt tt5
Kt #o
l^
I
tf/
,z tt8
Kz #9
T #t0
T
{ tfll
K^ #12
J
T
-4 lf L)
-r80-
17.1 Macro Call Command (Custom Macro Command)
A macro can be called from a single block, or modally from each block in the
call mode
Note) A macro call command cannot be specified in the MDI rnode.
17 .1.1 Simple calls
When the following command is executed, the custom macro body identified by P
(program number) is ca11ed.
G65 P(ptogr"* f(it.r.tio" ti*"") <argument assignment>;
When it is necessary ""*b"r)to transfer arguments to a custom macro body, the argument
is specified by <argument assignment>. The followlng tTr/o types'of <argument
asslgnment> can be specified. The argument menti-oned here is the actual
numerical value assigned to a variable.
(Note) G65 must be specified before arguments in the G65 block. The negative
sign and the decimal point can be used regardless of addresses in
<argument assignment>.
a) Argurnent assignment I
A-B-q D . ... .z
An argument can be assigned for all addresses except G, L, N, 0, and P.
Assignment need not be made in alphabetical order. Specification is made
according to word address format. Addresses not required may be omitted.
However, when I, J, and K are used, assignment must be made in the
alphabetical order.
pAn
UdU. I K valid
B_A__q .....J T
! . .. . . if -,.^-l
trv4rlu .' 'l
Addresses assigned in argument assignment I and the number of the variable in
custom macro body correspond as follows:
L 1tJ
E #8
F tt9
H #11
I
J lft
ltO
M flJ
a ttLT
R // 18
- r79 -
(Example)
G65AI .082.0r-3.014 .0D5.0Pi000;
;l?iT":-]-
It). ) n
{t3:
ll4 z-3 .
i/5:
#6
tl7 : )bt{ 5.0
In this example, even if arguments I4.0 and D5.0 are specified to variable
ll7 , rhe latter is effective.
During the macro call mode, the specified macro call instruction is called
every tj-me a motion command is executed..
(Example l) Drilling Cyele
At each positioning-point, the drilling cycle is operated.
Auxiliary
X move function
Flow of program
ll
ll
1l
1l
ll
lr
li
ll Ir
U U
Dwell Dwell
G67 ;
Macro is as follows. (In case of incremental programming)
o 9082 t
GOO Z //tB;
GOI Z #26;
GO4 X #24:
GOO Z- lROUND [/ilBl + ROUND ttt26));
Mqq.
- 182 -
Address of the argument assignment II Variable in user macro body
t4 ttr4
1f It
Jl1 /
T #1r)
J. {ttt
5
#18
T. #L9
b
I ll2A
o
JI.
K. lILL 1
Tl Jlaa
1I LL
Jl tt L)
K.t tt24
I^at ll2s
J^ It26
o
I^9 #28
J9 #29
K^ #30
1
)l.
rto 'IJI
1
Jto ttJZ
Kto #33
-181 -
'17.1.5 Subprogram call with M code
An M code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram. That is, instead of
NGXY M98PAAAA;
tE;E-r ow i n g s i*pTJ-c o*tnf,T-tcan be specified.
1
N G X Y ....
As f or ltg8, tt* 'i""Effiiort *^ro urDproJeq
,*^-1^.,^'1 vrr
^^ the program check screen, but I"IF and
M codes are not transmit.ted.
The correspondence between the calling M code xx and the program number AAAA of
the ealled subprogram must be set as a parameter.
Up to three 11 codes can be used for a subprogram call.
hrhen these M codes are specif ied in a macro called wit.h a G code or in a
subprogram called with an M code or a T code, the subprogram is not ca1led, but
these M codes are treated as ordinary M codes. Set the following parameters.
0 0 0 TMCR
17.1.7 Difference between M98 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body calt)
a) G65 can include arguments; I,198 cannot.
b) ItgA is used to branch to a subprogram after executing a command other than M,
P or L in the block; G65 is used to branch only.
c) When a I'198 b'lock includes an address other than O, N, P and L, execution of
the block stops as single block stop, a G65 block does not.
d) COS changes the level of local variable; M98 does nor. That. is, /ll specified
before G65 is one thing and /lI in the calling cusrom macro body is another.
iil specified before M98 is the same as /i I in the calling subprogram.
e). Up to four G65 calls, includ.ing G66, can be made in addition, M9B cal1s can
be made up to eight calls rogether with calls by G65 and G66.
- r84 -
!,.,':j
?r.
(Note) These ln{ codes are different from usual M codes and theY must be commanded
at the star t of a block (just after the sequence No., if there is).
- lB3 -
Macro Macro Macro Macro
Main program (Level I ) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 4)
o o--
M99 M99
Local rariable
(Level 0) (Leve1 1) (Level 2) (Level 4)
l) The main program is provided with ill to /133 local variables (leve1 0).
2) When the macro (leve1 1) is called with G65, etc., the local variable
(level 0) of the main program is stored, and llI to #33 local variables
(level 1) for lihe macro (1evel l) are prepared. Argument transfer is
possible for this purpose. (This also applies to (3) below).
3) The loca1 variables (level I, 2,3) are stored each time the macros (leve1
2,3,4) are ca11ed, and new local variables (level 2,3,4) are prepared.
4) When the operation returns from each macro with M99, the local varlables
(1evel 0, l, 2,3) stored in (2) and (3) are set in the same conditions as
when they were stored.
0 (Prograrn Number);
Commands
(Variables, arithmecic
operation and control
'' instruction can be
sPsLrr rcu. ,l
Mqq.
LL,2 ,
-iB6-
n'i!k;i
.8 Multiplex calls
17.1
l) Multiplex ca11s
Similarly to a subprogram ca11ed from another subprogram, a macro can be
called from another macro
The multiplicity should be less than or equal to four including simple and
modal calls.
2) Multiplex modal calls
In modal calls, the specified macro is called each time a motion command is
executed. When several modal macros are specified, the next macro is ca1led
each time a motion command in the first macro is executed. Macros are
successively called from those assigned later.
(Example 1)
G66 P9i00;
z 10000; (1-r)
G66 P9200;
z i5000 t (L-2)
G67; : P9200 cancelled
G67; : P9100 cancelled
z-zsooo; (l-3)
o 9100;
X 5000; (2-L)
Mao.
0 9200;
z 6000; (3-i)
z 7000; (3-2)
MAO.
Sequence of execution (A block vrithout a motion command is omitted in
this chart. )
(1 - 1) ft -?\
(Note ) A rnodal macro is not called after (l-3), which is not in macro call
mode.
3) Custom macro level and local variable
l^lhen a macro is called with G65, G66, or a G code which calls a macro, the
level of t.he macro increases by one. As a result, the 1evel of the local
variable also increases by one. Namely, t.he relationship between the macro
call and loeal variable is as follows.
-185-
3) Undefined variables
The value of a variable whi,ch has not yet been defined is called <vacant>.
Variable #0 is used for a variable that is always <vacant>.
An undefined variable has the following naEure:
'a) Quotation
When an undefined variable is quoted , the address itself is also ignored.
b) Operation
<vacant> is the same as 0 except when replaced by <vacant>.
ll2=lllx5 ll2=lll*'5
I
*zlo 112=0
ll2={lI+lll llZ=lll+ttt
I I
It2=0 1t2=0
c) Conditional expressions
<vacant> differs from 0 only for EQ and NE.
I I
Established Not established
#lNEO #lNEO
I I
Established Not established
#i cE /i0 #l cE #0
i I
Established Established
/ll cr 0 ill cT 0
i I
Not established Not established
-lB8-
gariables can be used j.n a custom macro body. Also arithmetic instructions and
control instructions are commandable.
Actual values for variables are specified with a macro call command.
17.2.2 Variables
Variables can be used in the macro instead of numerical data. The user can
assign any value (within the allowed range) to them. Using variables allow
custom macros to become much more flexible than the conventional sub-routines.
Several variables can be used, and each variable is identified by a variable
number.
1) Varlable expressions
A variable is composed of the code /i and a number as shown belovi.
//l(i=L,2,3 ,4.....)
(Example I ) lt5
tf Lo9
#1005
The following format can also be used where numbers are replaced bv <Formula>
il [<Forrnula> I
(Example 2) # t#1001
#[#1001-ll
# ltt6l 2l
Variable lli explained hereafter can always be replaced with variable ll
[<Forrnula> ]
Quotation variables
The numerical value following an address can be replaced with a variable.
<address>i/i or <address>-ili indicates that the value of the variable or its
complement is substituted for the command value of the address.
z-l #18+1t261
-187-
List'of System Variables
#3005 Setting
lf27O0 - #2706 Work offset value
(Z axis)
a) Inrerface signals /1f000 ro /ll0f5 and tlL032, /i1100 ro /lir55 and llLl32,
/ill33
T--..+
IrrPuL ^-i ^'.^1
-rStrdr
The status of the interface input q'i on: I i q dof orm'i narl hrr rorrl i no the
values of the system variables /I1000 to /f I0l5 , li1032.
- 190 -
.;.i,..:4,
-rB9-
Output signal
Interface output signals can be issued by assigning values to system
variables #1100 to /11115, Itrr32, #1133.
an
JU
rrrrJJ = L tz
Jlrraa r^a
- * Vi) - 2-' * V-
r-w
JI
-r92-
System varj-able Po inL Interface
input signal
# 1000 I ?
o rTr nnn
'1
//r00r I 2; ur001
#1002 I 2; ur002
#1003 i 2;, ur003
#1004 I 2; ur004
#1005 I 2; ur00s
// r 006 I 2; ur006
#1007 I 2; ur007
#1008 i )"
-q rTT ong
#1009 I 2: ^ Ur009
#r0r0 i )Lv
-t
ITTor o
2:: uroll
1
#i0l I I
tf t0L2 I )rz?
-t rTTnr?
# l0r3 I 2:: urOi3
#10i4 I 2r, laJ
UrO14
i/1015 I 2^' ur015
Since the variable value read is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system,
t.he unit system must be considered in preparing a macro.
The readlng system variable 1t'1032 is used to read 16 points lnput signals
a:
at one time.
: 15 j
li 1032 = I /l [1000+i] *2'
t-u
'j.
i;
System variables i/1000 to /lt0t5, llL032 cannor be used as a lefr side rerm
a! i-n a calculation command.
i;
d
F
q.
E
G
- 191 -
&
b) Tool offset amounr ll2o00 to ll22o0
The tool offset amount can be determined by reading the value of the
system variable ll200l to ll22o0. The offset values can also be modified by
assigning a value to the system variable //1.
System variable numbers for tool offset amounr
(rn case of memory c and compensation numbers are uo to 200)
199 tf2199
200 {t2200
(Note) The value of variable number /i2000 is only used to read the value. The
value is alwavs 0.
c) System variables for work zero point offset values tt2500 - 112906
By reading the values of system variables ll25OO - ll29O6, work zero point
offset values are determined.
By assigning va,lues to these variables, work zero point offset values can
be chansed.
-194-
-;r;ts;:#
The last values of the system variable #1100 to #Ill5, ltLl32 and #if33
issued are stored as 1.0 or 0.0.
(llote) When a value other than I.0 or 0.0 is assigned to //1100 ro //1115,
<vacant> is assumed as 0 and values other than <vacant>,and 0 are
assumed as l. A value under 0.00000001 is indefinite.
(Example l)
1) llacro used to read three digits of BCD data with a sign by address
switching.
Structure of DI
zLs 2r4 2r3 2ro
e2E 21 26 2s 24 23 22 2L
Structure -of DO
2E 27 26 2" 24 23 22 2' 20
/l r00=-il r00;
N9 100M99;
2) Read eight types of signed 6-digit BCD data (three digits to the left
of the decimal point and. three digits t.o the right of the decimal
point) by address switching in #101.
Machine tool composition
When D0 2 = O, three digits to the right of the decimal point
? - l. r I three digits to the left of the decimal point
When DO 2- to 2- = 000, data No.l
001, data No.2
11 t , data tlo. 8
Macro call command
c65P9l0lD (data number) ;
The custom macro body is specified as follows:
09101 ;
c65P9l00D I lt7*2+I) i
/f l0l=/l100;
c6 5P 9 l00D I lt7 x2] ;
# L)r=lf r0 l+/r r00/ l 000 ;
1199;
-193-
(Example 3) Drill cycle (For incremental programming)
(Equivalent to G8l)
llacro call command
c65 P9081 L (Repetition time) R (R point) W (Z-point);
The custom macro body is specified as follows:
0908 r ;
#3003=l;
c00w /llB; The single block stoP is not
G0lI^I i/23 ; executed. #18 corresponds to
c00w-[RouND[#r8] + ROUND llt23)l; R and ll23 corresponds to W.
/t3003=0;
Mqq.
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0
4 0 0
0 X
6 o X
0: F'f f o n t i rra
L:Yv'
V. Suppressed
-196-
.iil " ?'.:
d) Alarm #3000
hlhen detecting an error in the macro, an alarm can be generated. When an
alarm number is specified in the system variabte /i3000, the alarm lamp is
turned on and the alarm status is entered after the proceeding block is
processed.
/l 3000=n (ALARI MES SAGE) ;
(05n<99), an alarm No.=500+n
An alarm message of less than 26 characters can be specified in the
section between control-out and control-in.
e) Clock #300I , 1t3002
The clock time can be determined by reading the values of the system
variables #3001 , 113002. The time can be preset by assignirfg a value to
the system variable.
+l The suppression of the single block stop and the wait for the auxiliary
function end signal.
lrrhen the following values are assigned to the system variable #3003, the
single block st.op function is suppressed and execution advances from one
block to the next without awaiting the end signal (FIN) of auxiliary
functions (S, T, 1"1 and B). When the end signal is not awaited, the
distribuEion end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. Be careful not to
specify a subsequent auxiliary function without awaiting the end signal.
I Suppressed Av/aited
-i95-
{I
'd
.{
1l
I
{
j
:
Modal information i
Sv stern variab le of preceding block :
a
- r98 -
ii.
IAPEF REV4
-t97-
(Exaurple 4)
The tool moves to a point appropriate to the machine tool (xp, yp, zp
distant from a reference point) through a programmed intermediate point;
and after processing a sequence of operations, returns to the original
point.
Macro call command
G65 P9300 X(Intermediate point)Y(Intermediate point)Z (Intermediate
point) ;
The custom macro body is specified as follows:
09300;
ill=//5001;
ttZ=tt5002:'
//3=/i 5003;
G00 z1126;
xll24 \1125; I
i
./ ,ntocessr.ng/
:
x#24 Yltzs zlt26;
x#L \lt2z
uil
!t2..
J,
"
Mqq.
... . ,
-200-
,$,iffi#
(Note 1) The tool length offset amount is not the amount. in effect just
before the block is executed; it is the amount for the current
block.
(Note 2) The block end point (ABSI0) of the skip (c31) is the position where
the skip signal has turned on or the end point of the block if the
skip signal has not turned on.
-199-
t) Prgcision
Always consider the precision of a custom macro function used for Preparation
of programs.
a) Data format
Numeric data handled by a custom macro is in a floating decimal point
format as follows:
1"1* 2
"
F.
a = b^"c I.)) .
X IU^-10 1+.OO X rU -10
Relative error
a = b/c q.oo x ru -10 1.86 x l0-g- e
a
^-./v-
d-fu i.24 x l0-q- 3.73 x l0-q-
a=b*c
a=b-c 2. X ^ l0
,IU- 5.32 x I0-I0 mln. (;,:)
-202-
How to use function ROUND
1) If function ROUND is employed in an arithmetic operation command or in an
IF or WHILE conditional expression, the figure in function ROUND is
rounded off (counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disrdgarding
the rest) as is ordinary data with a decimal point.
( Example)
i/r=RouNDlr.2345l;
/ll becornes 1.0.
rF[#1 LE ROUNDlllZll G0r0 l0;
ROUND [//2 ] is 4. 0 it ltz is 3 . 567 .
2) If function ROUND is employed in a command to an address, it is rounded
off to the least input increment of the address.
l F Ytmn f
Sequence of
arthimetic operation
- 201 -
(Lxampre l)
tn
ttI20=I;
NI WHILE #T2O LE IO DO 1;
Repeated ten
N2 WHrLE //30 EQI DO2; times
Repeated while
N3END 2; variab le //30= I
llL20=ltl20+l
N4END I;
END 1;
(No)
nn l.
D0 m and END m must correspond to each other in one program.
DO
DO (No)
END I;
DO
F\TN 1. (No)
END 1;
-204-
b) Logical operation
EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and
subtraction. Therefore, be careful of errors. To determine whether or
not //l and ll2 are equal in the above, for example, '
rF ltr EQ ll2
is not always evaluated correctly. When the error is evaluated as in
IF ABS IIL _ II2 LT 5OOOO
and the difference between /i I and tl2 f.a1-1s within the range error, both
values must be considered equal.
c) Trigonometric functions
Absolute_Frrors occur in trigonometric functions; but, since they are not
under l0 " be careful of integration or division after using'a
trigonometric function.
17.2.5 Control commands
The program flow can be controlled by using the following commands.
1) D;{ergence (G0T0)
tiJ IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTOn
When <condltional expression> is satisfied, the next operation is
executed in the block with the sequence number n in the same program.
Sequence number n can be replaced by a variable or <Formul-a> .
When the condition is not satisfied, the control proceeds to the next
b 1ock.
IF [<condltional expression>] can also be omitted; and when it is, the
control passes to block n unconditionally.
The following expressions can be used for <conditional expression>.
#j EQ#k =
#j NE iik
#i cr /lk
#j LT /ik
/li cE i/k
#j LE ltk 5 t
<Formula> can be used instead of lli and /lk, and a variable or <Formula>
can be used instead of n.
(Note l) In the block with the sequence number "n" which will be executed after
a GOTO n command, the sequence number must be at the top of the block.
Branching in the reverse direction takes more time than that in the
forward direction.
2) IteraEion
WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m (m = L,2,3)
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks DO m to END m are
repeatedly executed, That is, Ehe condition of DO m block ls examined and
when the <conditional expression> is satisfied, control passes to the next
block. But when it is not satisfied, the block after END m is executed.
WHILE [<conditional expression>] can also be omitted 'as with IF, and if
omitted, blocks from D0 m to END m are executed eternally.
WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m and END m must be used as a pair.
Identification number m identifies this pair.
-203-
DO ranges cannot be intersected.
:
j
no l.
DO ?.
-- -,
. (No)
FNtn I!t .
F\]n
LL| v
t
L ,
.
nn t.
.f
. (yes)
F\tn 1
rt .
N9000.....;
-206-
(?) The same iden c if ica t ion number can be used many times.
no r.
tr'I\in r .
(Yoe\
no r.
[i\u I;
nn r.
nn ?.
Dn ?.
\ tcD/
END 3;
,c,t\U I;
trNn r.
Custom macro bodies or subprograms can be called from inside a D0
range. D0 statements can be nested up to three times more in the
custom macro body or in the subprogram.
arar t .
c65. . . (Yes)
G66.....; (Yes)
G67.....; (Yes)
FNIN
!L!U I .
1
t
nn t.
MOa
rrlv..... t (Yes)
END 1;
-208-
A branch cannot be made from outside to insj_de a D0 range.
GOTO 9000;
D0 1; (No)
N9000.....;
FI\IN 1.
nn 1.
N9000.....;
(No)
END I;
GOTO 9000;
207 -
(Example 3)
N lXl 000; Block currently executed
N2i/ t0= 100; I'tacro statement alreadv executed
N3Y I 000; Firs t CNCstatement
N4/11 100= 1 ; I'lacro statement executed
N5/i l= l0; Iulacro statement executed
N6X- 1000; Second CNC statement
Execution of
macro stalement
Execution of
CNC statemcnt
When the second CNC statement after the block currently executed is
the no-movement b1ock, macro statements up to that and next to the
second cNC statement (i.e. the no-movement block) aft.er the block
currentlv executed are executed.
(Exarnple 4)
N lXi 000; Bfock currently executed
N2//10=100; Macro statement already executed
N3Y 1000; First CNC statement
N4/iIr00=1; Macro statement executed
N5//l=I0; - Macro st.atement executed
N6Z IOOO; Second CNC sEatement (no-movement block)
NTilli0l=1; Macro statement executed
u8il2=20; Macro statement executed
N9X-i000; Third CNC statement
Execution of N4 N5
macro statement
Execution of
CNC statemenr
(b)
When the firsr- CNC statement after the block currently executed is the
no-movement block, the macro stat.emenE is not executed.
(Example 5)
N lY 1000; Block currently executed
N2ilI100=l; Ilacro statement already executed
ll3/i l= i0; Ilacro statement already executed
N421000; First CNC statement (no-movement block)
N5/l1l0l=l; Macro statement execuEed
N6i/2=20; l'lacro statement executed
N7X-1000; Second CNC staternent
Exccution of
CNC sratenrcnt
-210-
Blocks other than macro statements are sometimes referred Eo as CNC statements.
The nacro stat.ement differs from the CNC statement, in the following points:
i) In the normal single block mode, the single block stop does not occur.
(See item (3), Chapter 8)
ii) The macro sEatement. is not regarded as the no movement block in the cutter
compensation c.
iii) The time of execution differs.
iii) j-s described below in further detaj-l.
a) The macro statement existing next to the block which does not buffer the
next one (b1ock of non-buffering M code, or G3l block) is executed after
that block is executed.
(Example l)
NlXt000M00; Block currently execut.ed
N2i/1100=l; Macro statement
Execution
of macro statement
Execution of
CNC statement
b) llacro statement existing next to the block buffering the next one.
i) When not in cutter compensation C mode
When the current. block starts to be executed, the nexE nacro
statement is imnediately executed. The macro statement up to the
next CNC statement is executed.
(Exarnple 2)
N1G0 1X1000; Block currently executed
N2/il i00=1; Macro statement executed
N3i/ l= l0; Macro stat.ement executed
N4X2000; Next CNC statement .
Execution of
macro statement
Execution of
CNC statement
-209-
A block including a macro call command (G65, G66, G67), arithmetic command
and control command is not stopped even by single block operation.
The following parameter setting executes a single block stop for commands
other than macro call commands. This function is used for testins a custom
*^^-^
ulo!!v L^l-,
uugy.
U 0 I I SBK}I
0 0 I
(Setting operation is effective)
Setting to I specifies that custom macro bodies or subprograms wich
PRG9
program numbers 9000 to 9999 cannot be cancelled, and edited.
However, this affeets Ehe deletion of al1 programs during turning on.
Reset
I^lhen a clearedstatus is produced by a reset, all local variables and eommon
variables ill00 to if 149 become <vacant>.
System variables //1000 x ll Ll32 are not cleared.
Call condition and D0 condition are cleared by reset.
However a cleared status cannot be produced by the parameter (No. 040, LOCC,
EMC).
7) Display j-n PROGMM RESTART page
The M and T code" rrqerl fnr errhnrsgl4m calllng are not displayed like M98.
8) Feed hold
Macro statement execution stops at the end of the biock by turning on feed
hold. (It also stops by resetting or by alarm generation).
9) Other llmitations
a) Usable variables
//0, llL to /i33, #100 to tll49 , #500 to /1531, sysrem variables.
h) V:1id veriable values
v/
-2r2-
17.2.7 Codes and words used in custom macro
r
The following code can be used in the program of the cust.om macro in addition to
*t
'i codes used in conventional programs.
;,
*-
1) rso
*I
:.
F
x
Meaning 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I Character
: n o f!
i t o o 0 0 0
nl
a
::
l 0 0 0 OO 0 UJ
ll o tl
+. 0 o 0 0 1l
* 0 o o
o
0 .*
o o 0 0
oo 0
o 0 0 0
oo 0 o 0
z) ErA
Meaning 8 7 6 4 J 2 1
r Character
r
L Parameter (Data No. 0053)
l Parameter (Dara No. 0054)
Parameter (Dara No. 0044)
Parameter (Dara No. 0042)
Parameter (Dara No. 0043)
0, the same code 0 as in the program number, must be used. The hole pattern
for . ll, + and = in EIA code must be set as parameters (Data No.
0042 Eo 0044, 0053, 0054). Ilowever, the character with no punched hole
eannot be used. Note that alphabetic characters can be used, but when used
as /1, they are not used in their proper sense.
i
Special words used in custorn macro are: .
OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, ANd LE.
1
s
AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE,
DO, END
:
17.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body
:
I
i
A custom macro body is similar to a subprogram; it is registered and edited in
the same \^iay as a subprogram.
The memory used to register custom macro bodies is included in the storage
capacity of the CNC.
17.4 Limitations
r) MDI operation
Macro call and subprogram call command cannot be specified in MDI mode.
However, if I'IDI operation B function i.s provided, subprogram call command can
be performed.
2) Sequence number search
Sequence numbersin the custom macro body cannot be searched for.
1) Single block
A block, other than one including a macro call command, arithmetic command,
or control command, can be executed as a single block stop even when in the
macro.
E
i;
- 2rl -
18.3 Key Position
The location of keys is shown in the figure below.
trtrtrtrtr
tr trETE tr B-4rh-D
+l
trMMMM
18.4 Each Address Restrictions
1
L/
\ rf rha nffeol No. is commanded by address D, the modal value of H is also
rewritten. (Distj-nqs use of addresses D and H cannot be done.)
18.5 Setting of Setting Parameters
(SETTTNG 2)
PWE :O (0: DISABLE I: ENABLE)
_TAPEF = 0
No. TAPEF =
MDI
1) Subprogeram call
To call .61 srrlrnrnorom i f a command of more than 4 digits is used for
designati." *". (address P), the last 4 digits become the
";"i;"""
subprogram No. and"lfot"*t"*
if the times of repetitive calling (address L) is not
specified, the tj-mes of repetition becomes one.
.
-214-
18. 10/11 TAPE FORMAT
Memory operation of the progran registered by 10/ll tape format is possible for
rhe following funcEions with setting of the seEting parameters.
a) Cutter compensation (G40, G4l, G42)
b) Subprogram call (UlAl
c) Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80 - G89)
F Difference of tape format between 0/00 and 10/11 is shovm in TabIe below.
i
Function IO/II OM
P: Subprogram No. P
L: Times of repetitive call 111: Times of repetive call
pppp: Subprogram No.
Canned cvcle rG73r X Y ; G73-r X Y
iCllrt, Z R_
p-
ttGT4tl Z R-
i ic76i 0-
rG8lr F
_ 1G76 t P-
i cgr
l-
L i
.n
I I' I
n. rlt
i
t LG89I L.Atl
F
i
& L: Times of repetition K: Tirnes of repetition
i
;
18.2 Address and Range of Command Values
t
Some addresses which could not be used for 0/00 series can be used by format
conversion. In this case, even if format conversion is set, restriction of 0/00
format is applied to the range of conaand values being used for the basic
address, and if a value out of the 0/00 fornat range is registered, a P/S alarm
is generated.
Added basic addresses and their range of command values are mentioned in Table
below. 0ther addresses will have the same specification as address in 0/00
series.
-2r3-
III OPERATION
iii) Manual handle feed (See Section III-4.4)
By rotatlng the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance cor-
respondlng to the degree of handle rotation.
?\ Toor movement by prograrni-ng - Automatic operation (see Sect ion III-5)
Program
Memory
Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory, the machine can be run
according to the program instructions. This operation is cal1ed memory
operat ion.
- 2IB -
F
I 1. INTRODUCTION
1) Manual operation
a) Manual reference point return (See Sectlon III-4.1)
The LNC machine tool has a position used to deternine the machlne posi-
tion.
This position is called the reference point, where the tool is replaced or
the coordinates are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned onr the
tool is moved to the reference polnt.
Manual reference point return is to move the tool to the reference point
using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator's pane1.
Op"r"tor's panei
ooo o
Orrl
oo | |
ooo
r
The tool can be moved to the reference point also with program cornnands.
This operation is called automatlc reference polnt return. (See Section
rr-6. I)
g
Operator's panel
\
ooo oo
'i
Manual
handle
Orrr
oorrr
ooo
Work
* -217-
ii) Start and stop (See Section III-5.5)
Cycle start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
reset
Stop caused
Program stop I by program
Program end
)
I I
I
I Workpiece i I
Depth of Depth-of-
I
manual cut specified
I
handle by the program
feed
I
-220-
&
a
g
1i) I,IDI operation
MDI operation
After the program is entered, as an eornrnand group, from the I"IDI keyboard,
the nachine can be run according to the program. Thls operatlon is called
MDI operation.
3) Automatic operation
1) Program selection (See Secrion III_5.2.I)
Data format in memory
Work-l program
M30 I
0 1002 Program number
Program number
search
Work-2 program Automatlc
operation
M30
0 1003 Program number
I.lork-3 program
select the program used for the work. ordinarlly, one program is prepared
for one work. rf two or more progra*s are in me'ory, select the progran
to be used, by searchlng the progra' number (Sectron rrr-10.4).
-2t9-
ili) Single block (See Sectlon III-6.7)
wCycle
(.r/,/
r,/,4
(/^
Tool
t,/ ,/ )
lLz-t
Stop Stop
Single block
b) How to view the posicion display change without running the machine
i) M,achine lock (Sef Sections III-6. I and III-6.2)
ll*rT
w.zt
(//) CRT/TTDI
V7j tool
V)
VA
Change caused by
machine movemcnt
Machine lock
r-i:,'i=T
::,:l:
4) Program test
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It
checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This
check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the
position display change (without running the machine).
a) Check by running
i) Dry run (See Section III-6.6)
i'l----- -- It |t;
-- -- -L I --__ _ _t: L'
Drv run
-221-
i) Off set value (See ,sectlon III-10.1. )
Tool compcnsation
number I
Tool compensation
number 2
Tool compensation
Screen Keys number 3
CNC memory
-224-
5) Parr program editing (See secti-on III-9)
After a created program is once reglstered in memory, it can be correct.ed or
modlfied from the CRT/MDI panel.
Program correction
Program registmtion or modification
Nl .
T/MDI
N2.
h
{} NC tape (program)
PPR
This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit function.
Data setting
display
Screen Keys
I
Data
CRTi NTDI
CNC memory
Data stored i-n NC menory can be displayed and corrected via the CRT/MDI
sc reen.
-223-
ii) Displaylng and setting parameters (See Sectlon III-10.4)
Parameters
Rapid traverse rate
Positional control system
Reference point return sYstem
Screen KeYs
Backlash compensation data
Pitch error compensation data
CNC memory
Machine
operation
-225-
iii) Displaying and setting operatorrs setting data (See Section III-I0.2)
Setting data
M^irror image machining on/
olt setttng
Screen Keys
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Machine
operation
Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator rn ope-
ration. This data causes urachine characteristics to change.
The above data is called setting data.
Operator's panel
Data
protection
CRT/MDI key
Program
Offset value
Parameters
Setting data
CNC memory
A key called the data protection key can be defined. rr is used to pre-
vent the program, offsetr pararneters, setting daEa, etc. from being
registered, set, modified, or deleted erroneously.
-226-
Display
i) Prograrn display (See Section III-1 I . 1. )
Active program
number
Program.tontent
01 002 01 046
01057 01245 01556....
02006 02567 03456...,
Program list
"l I x OOOO @O
ir
ti.,
I Y oo@ ooo
I
I z OO@ OOO
ll'
I
+x
Work coordinate CRT screen
system
The current posit,ion of the tool ls displayed with the coordinate values.
The distance from the current position to the target position can also be
displayed.
iii) Alarm display (See Section IIL-11. s)
When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displayed at bottom, pressing the
l-ALAffil button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below.
a2@@@ NATSA
x -1,2.54@
Y -42.5@A
z @.a@@
RLN rrF *r- .r.,-ETT,Sfl *.J
r;-ir;ln;tffit
-228-
.'. .'i::{
Display on the
XY pla4e Three dimensional display
"tr'
229 -
.,--l-..:
Tape reader
Portable tape read et
FANUC PPR
/A\
V Paper tape
Memory
interlace
Floppl,disk
Automatic programming
system
.
-;:.'Ir-. '
1.:
:,.
'-;'1.--.: r
-230-
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The CRT/|'lDI panel consists of a CRT display (9" amber) and keyboard as in the
following illustration.
l) CRT/MDI panel for 0-I1B
EAEEE
EEE Program
edit key
EtrEB
tilEtr
trBE
Input key
@BOONME
Page Function key Start/output key
change key I
Cursor
moYe key
2) Full key
Program
POftR edit key
l,*l
rtrtr
Input key
trEtrE
lo*' g
- 23r -
2.1.1 MDI keyboard
(3) Address and numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, nu-
meric, and other characters.
(4) INPUT key When an address or a numerical key is
pressed, the alphabet or the numeral is
input once to the key input buffer, and it
is displayed on the CRT screen. To set the
data input to the key input buffer in the
offset register, etc., press the INPUT key.
Thls key is equivalent to rhe INPUT key of
the soft keys, so the same results can be
obtained by pressing either of them.
(5) Cancel (CAN) key Press this key to delete the last character
or symbol input to the key input buffer.
The contents of the key input buffer are
displayed on the CRT screen. When the ad-
dress key or the, numerical key is pressed
next, the position where the alphabet or the
numeral is inserted next is indicated by
rt lt
_ a')a
LJL _
Table 2.1.1 MDI keyboard function (2/2)
@
t-otrR--l
Setting and display of parameter
Alarm nurnber display and setting and display
and dlsplay of diagnostic daEa.
of soflware operatort s
I ALARM I
pane1.
Graphic function.
I GRAPH I
Several pages are inciuded in the chapter selected wlth each function button.
The page is selected with PAGE button.
(Note) The data displayed on the screen disappears when one of the function
buttons and the lffil key are pressed. Thereafter, when either function
button is pressed, the corresponding screen is dlsplayed again. When the
unit is not used with the povrer turned on for long time, turn off the
screen. This ls effective to prevent the image quality from deterio-
rating.
-233-
2.2 Machine Operator,s panel
The operatorrs panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the
different tools. Operations of a typical operator t s panel are explained as
shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bv the machine
tool builder.
ra c o
o
v
/A ""2 @
,ffi \r'*"^""6 roL&sTEpFr:Fr)
o
((
.\j/
Si^'-'f
)'i
FEED
HOLI)
o,'' I \ltll 1,n,, lt ri v(o66
+x +\'
\/ v \r'
,#,'JRu
+?
o
OFF ON
(N) -
'?'J!"!i,"
r IOO
\r/
STEP FEED
AMOUNT
HA\DLE
o ""(N"'i
rFF ,.-=\ nN z' n \ ,/ I /-1\ xloo
\)/
dlD)
\tll'
i dlD\
.t,,. o \lIeY r:ro
N,
v
/rN-\
\\\/
v
MACHINE
o-\ FEEDRATE JOG FEEDRATE HANDIE AXIS
LOCK OVERIDE m/mm r"TJil3.',?*
-234-
Table 2.2 Element functions
Name Function
Cycle start button By selecting an execution program then pressing this push-
button, automat ic operation is started . During automatic
operation, the lamp inclicating automat ic operation is on.
l'eed hold button hlhenthis pushbutton is pressed drrring automatic opera-
tion, the tool decelerates then stops.
Mode selection Select a mode, depending on the operation type.
but ton
Jog & step feed By pressing this button, manual continuous or sEep feed
is executed.
Handle By rotating the handle, the tool is rotated in the cor-
responding direction.
Single block By placing the single block switch in Ehe 0N position,
automatic operation is executed by one block.
Optional block skip By placing this switch in the 0N position, the optional
switch block skip is executed.
h rrr
".J
rr rn Bv placing this switch in the 0N posiEion, the dry run is
executed.
Feed rate override Selects the amount of override for automatic or manual
opera t ion.
-235-
2.3 Tape Reader
Tape
6. Grips reader
3. Capstan
opera.tlon ,1 1- Cable stored p a11
swrtcn i _
2. r sourcell
Light 1| t[ l-- I
Optical
reader part
lll - 13. Readeri
puncher
Metal ll lil ll lj ,lr
interface
fittingA ll lll I l: ii
Twinderll lil ll .l , lll
)3."., fl] ,111_ _-]---r
lock
l
10.
Lowering
Iock Photo
Iever amplifier
5. Tape
box
Functi-ons
-zJo-
Table 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part (214l.
4. Tape Reader Control Switch A 3-position switch used to control the Tape
Reader.
-237-
Table 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part (3/4)
Functions
Metal fitting A
Push
-238-
Tabf e 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part (4141
Feed hole
x
(41 !y1r- the tape until the top of the tape goes past the capstan roller.
check that the NC rape is correctry pbsllionei by the Tape Guide.
(q) Lower the Light
Source.
(6) Turn the switch to the AUTO position.
}x
\1-i Suspend the top and rear-end of the tape in the Tape Box.
c) Un1 oading the NC tape
(i)
X Turn the switch to the RELEASE position.
(2) Lift the Light Source and remove
the tape.
/1\ Lower the Light Source.
d) Sto rage
rr ) Store
the cables into the cable box (11).
(2) Pressthe lowering lock lever (r0) dor,mward at both sldes.
(, Raise the taBe reader wlth the grips (6) (ratch release operation).
Then, lower it.
(A setfing the cover lock (g), carry the tape reader with the grlps
t!!"t
(6).
-239_
2.3.2 Note for handling tape reader
1) Precautions on tape loading
When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to
read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO
code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within rhe tape, from
which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC
tape should be set as shown in the figure below.
(
Ir
tt
|l.-...'----.-'...---* lhe program which should he read
|
I
Set the tape so that this section Actually, the end of block code (;) is
is under the glass window. CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
Data can be stored in afcassette with bubble memory (Bl/82). NC data can also
be input from this cassette co the NC. The interface is reader/puncher
interface.
FANUC CASSETTE
CASSETTE ADAPTOR
NC connecting
connector Fio^f l-"-.
See the FANUC CASSETTE Operatorrs Manual (B-53484E) for rhe FANUC CASSETTE ope-
rat ion.
See Chapter III-12 in this rnanual for data input/output operation from and to
FANUC cassette.
-240-
2.5 FANUC PPR
An I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and prlnter in'one systep.
Interface is reader/puncher interface.
Reel unit
Printer
tape punch
Switch unit
FANUC PPR
NOTE: When pressing the POWER ON k.y, do not touch any other CRT/l-DI panel
keys. Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed t uv
Ja -^+
llvL ts^"^L
LvuLll
them. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special operation pur-
pose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.
the machine.
,*
-242- 'd
t
5
s 't,
-:';tj
:.i:,i:;.t
,t-
4. MANUAL OPERATION
The tool Boves along the selected axis to the decelerated point
rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference point at the FL at the
A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse speed.
moti.on.
-243-
@ fn" machine stops at the reference point lighring the REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLETION LED.
/A/n\/A\
Yl\/_Y
REFERENCE POINT RDTURN
COMPLETION LED
o"'o
\'rEP/HANDLE
{ {N
uo,, lS1,o"
@ S"t."t the axis ro be moved.
A A
+X +Y +Z
A\
V V V _Z
/A -X
/A
/A V -Y
v
(())
\r'
\\ ))
-244-
@ Select JoG feedrate
{^frtl\
.\ \t'Jy I,,uo
JOG
FEEDRATE
mm/min
Feedrate
I )n 0. 08
2 1t 0. t2
3 5.0 n,
4 7.9 0.3
5 12.6 0.5
6 20 0.8
32 , 1.2
I 50 2.0
9 79 3.0
r+ 10 t26 5.0
t
?
lt 200 8.0
F
3
L2 320 l2
i
I
a
t.3 500 20
"{
: t4 790 30
i
t l5 L260 50
*
$
;
(Note 1) The feedrate error (about +3%) affects on the feedrate in the table
i above.
-245-
@ Rapid traverse
To execute the rapld traverse by manual mode, push RAPID TRAVERSE button
too.
.RAPID TRAVERSE
STEP feed is available for the machine without manual pulse generator.
Select the desired amount of movement.
x1000
x10000
xr0
x100000
XT
'i
*
:9
-246- I
lt:
3
;
@ Select the axis
Wtrenthe switch is pressed once, the axis Eoves by the anount speclfied in
lts direction.
Then when the switch ls pressed after releasLng it once, the axis moves by
the specified amount.
(Note 1) The feed rate is the same as the jog feed rate.
(Note 2) The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse over-
rlde is effecttwe during rapid traverse.
4.4 Manual Handle Feed
The feed rate can be adjusted precisely by usLng the manual pulse generator.
ri)
s./ Set the MODE SELECT swltch to the IIANDLE position.
----l-t-
Awo // \ srep/HaNor-e
..*( @),""
O Select an axis.
i'
t
I
;
tt
F
-247-
O Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.
a a
/A
v
a a
clockwise rotation * direction
counterclockrrise rotation direction
(The direction varies with the machine tool builder.)
@ Movernent amount
In some cases, thejperatorrs panel is provided with the following selector
switch. xl0 nultiplies the movement amount.by l0;x100 by 100.
xl0
X100 (Note 2)
Handle Multiplier
-248-
4.5 Manual Absolute ON and OFF
Ihis switch selects whether the amount of manual movement is to be added to the
absolute value.
1) Wtren the switch is ON.
Yaxis
Xaxis
x2
x1
:
G0lc90xr00. 0Y100. 0F0 10;
x200.0YI50.0 ;
x300.0Y200.0 ;
a) Wtren block @ has been executed after nanual oDeration (X-axis +20.0'
Y-axls +100.0) at the end of movement of block O:
Y
( r2o.o,2oo.o) Qzo.o '250.0)
t
( 200.0 , 150.0 )
Manual opetation-
When manual absolute switch is ON
( 1 00.0 , 100.0 )
-249-
b) l.then the feed hold button is pressed while block
@ is being executed,
manual operation (y-axls +75.0) is performed, and che
is pressed and released. cycle start button
- 1ioo.o,2oo.o)
Manual operation + -
( 200.0 , r s0.0 )
( 1s0.0 , 125.0 )
(300.0,275.0)
( 200.0 , 225.0)
(l sos ,200.0 ) .-\ -e_
Manual absolute srvitch OFF
lr{anual absolute srvitch ON ( 300.0 , 200.0 )
Manual operation
( 200.0 , l 50.0 )
( 1s0.0 ,I 2s.0 )
( r 00.0 , 100.0 )
-250-
Fd, axlsWhen there is only one axis in the following
returns.
cornmand, only the conmanded
-ri _
?
I
I
Manual absolute switch ON
(Note 1) The followlng occurs when manual operation ls performed during cutter
compensatlon.
1) Tfre I{ANUAI ABSOLUTE swl-tch ts OFF and cutter compensatlon is being performed.
Afteilnanual operatlon ls performed with the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ln the
OFF position durLng cutter compensatlon, autonattc operation is restarted
then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed
if nanual novement had not been performed. The anount of separati;n eguals
to the amount that was performed nanually.
""'ot
oo"r"rrol /
V
/
/
Cutter center path
" ,.t:il
-251- .- l.-+T;i*
2) The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON and cutter compensation is being performed.
Operation of the machine upon return to automatlc operation after manuaL
intervention with the manual absolute switch in the 0N position during exe-
cution with an absolute command Program in the cutter compensation rnode will
be described. The vector, the remalning part of the current block and the
beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel the amount of manual move-
menL performed is included in the calculations of the vectors of the two
blocks subsequent to the current block. This also applies when manual opera-
t ion is performed during cornering.
a) During block executj-on
(Exarnple 1)
vaz
VO
,/l t,
a\
VBl
\--- -/1vc2
r6
,/,
Pp
\
\
VBl' Y
-(\
\rn
\ \ )\
Tool center path
\
'\l'I '\ Tool center path before manual operation
(\
.'i--
t'I
Manual operation
\/
PH'
-252-
Assume that the feed hold was applied at. point Pr. whlle moving from p^ to
i
* Po of prograrmed path P^ , Po, and P^ and that th6 tool was manually ntved
t'
i td PHr. The block end^polfrt Po moVes to the point Po'by the amount of
nanudl movement, and vectors V-i and V-^ at P- also mo'7e to V-,t e.nd V-^t.
Vectors V.' and V", between tff6 next tfso blo"cks Po - t,- anf,!,- - prrofre
discarded "alnd new "vbctors V^r t and V^"t (V..rt = Y ni in t'he examlle aSove)
i are produced from the relaUton betwE'en Po*'- P""?nd Pn - Pn. However,
since Vor t is not a newly calculated vecflor, co"rrect olfset "ls not per-
formed trf block Pr' - PC. 0ffset is correctly performed after PC.
(Example 2)
l'B2 l/rt
)
s
\..
lrBl t''cz
\,-' \
--\ \
t"\
vB2'..t
/\\ '.
/\ \ /,
i.\.Y
Absolute command program path
r. _==\41
vBl Y.-.-- \ ,,.
*
(r
\YB\ \
\\\\\
tt\
a\
\\
_t \\
\
\ ru\,i
VAI
center puth t
) l'A2
Tool
\
Manual operation
?
l
i
:
t. V,aZ' Pn' V.A. l'
F
E.
ft
-253-
This is an example when manual operation is performed during cutter com-
pensation cornering. VAZt, VBlr' and Vg2t are vectors moved in parallel
wlth V62' VBl and Vg2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors
are calculated from VCt and YCZ. Then correct cutter compensation is
performed for the blocks following Pc.
b) Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated by
single block stop.
l'B2 VCl
VBl
Manual
operation
Vn t' ,/
\/"
vst' /4
Absolute command program path
\
Tool center path
vectors Vg1 and vg2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation Sub-
sequent processing is the same as case a) described above.
An MDI operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation.
The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
-254-
5. AUTOMATIC OPEBATION
MDI
Awo'/--r---.-\
s
srpp/rHNor_s
,o,,( ),""
@ Press the cycle start button.
Cycle start tamp lights
/A
@
VCycle start
hltren pressed, automatic operat.ion beglns and the cycle start larnp lights.
5.1.2 MDI operation
One command block can be entered frour the CRT/UDI panel- for execution.
1) For example, X10.5 Y200.5; I
a) Set the mode select switch to MDI mod.e.
-255-
c) Push PAGE button to display a screen with llDr at the top left.
PROGRFT'I W |W
0'rDI ) (|'{]DA_)
tr
GAR
G1? P
G96 A
G94 H
G21 N
GzlAS
BI9 T
GBA
GE
?
Are.
I'IDI
PRSRtr'1 W TW
0,'rDI) (F0m_)
X LS.WB F
Y M.ffi GMR
GT? P
G96 e
GgI H
E1 t'l
G4A S
G49 T
B8
9=
Rm.
I{D I
-256-
2) canceling Y200.5 of XI0.5 Y200.5; before pressing tn" I-SfAnfl button (cycle
-
D ^' F
+L4r L L.
UUL
''
r rlVrr/
^- \
(MODAL)
c00 c90 G2t G49 c98 G54
c17 G94 c40 c80 G67 G64
F 1000 P H 5300
R Q M03 T0i01
ADRS
I'IDI
CURRNT
- L) I
2) Program execution
(I'IODAL)
GOO G9O GzT G49 G9B G54
c17 G94 G40 c80 G67 G64
F 1000 P H s300
R a M03 r0r01
ADRS
MDI
CURRNT
Set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermedi.ate point
is possible. )
Push "START" key or Cycle Start button on the operatorrs panel. By tiris
action, the prepared program will start. When the program end (M02, M30) or
ER(%) is executed, the prepared prograrn will be automatically erased and the d
3) Cautions
a) Programs registered in the program tnemory can be called as subprogram. In
thi-s case, the nest of subprogram is up to 2-loops combined with automatic
operation (AUTO) program. (If a custom macro option is provided, up to
4-loops combined is possible.)
b) If the custom macro option is provided, even in the MDI mode, custom macro
program preparation and execution is possible.
However, macro call is not possible.
c) A program to be prepared in the MDI mode uses program memory vacant area.
If there is no vacancy in the program memory, program preparation in the
MDI mode is not possible.
d) Programs prepared in the MDI urode will be erased in the following cases:
i) In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed.
ii) In AUTO mode, if memory operation is perforned.
iii) In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed.
iv) Background editing is performed.
e) The editing operation during the stop of MDI operation will start from
Ehe cursor position which makes start, but not from the current cursor
Dosltion.
-258-
5.2 Starting Automatic OPeration
i
r) I',1emo ry operation
?
I
l
t Select execution program.
Press cycle start button on the machine operatorts pane1.
There are two means to stop the automatic operaLion. One is to command a stop
command in a program where the exeeution is to be stopped (See 5.4.1 - 5.4.3)
and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate
button on the operator's panel (See 5.4.4 and, 5.4.5).
5.4.1 Program stop (M00)
Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the
program is stopped, all exlst.ing modal information remains unchanged as in
single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted
|
by specifying an
NC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
t
+
-259-
&,
5.4.4 Feed hold
When Feed Hold button on the operatorrs panel is pressed during automatic ope-
ration, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time.
I Press the feed hold button.
I{hen pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cyc.le start lamp turns off.
Turns off
v
t()l
Cycle start
At this tine, tF
i) Feeding stops if the tool is moving.
ij-) Dwell execut.ion stops, if executing.
iii) l'1, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
5.4.5 Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be rnade to the reseE
state by using RESET key on the CRT/IDI panel or e*ternal reset signal.
5.5 Program Re-start
-260-
When the block is the first
time, the upper 4 digits can be onitted.
Furtherr the leading zero can be ornitted except Sequence No. when the
frequency is specified.
f) After completion of block search, the CRT screen is changed to the progran
re-start screen.
/h I
-
a) When power is turned 0N or emergency stop is released, perform all neces-
sary operati-ons at that time, including the reference point return. (See
Notes )
b) Move the tool manually to the program starting point (machining start
point), and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the same condi- {
tions as at the machining start. *
c) lf necessary, set and modify the offset amount. *.
Il
d) Turn the program re-start SW on the machine operation panel ON. i
:
-262-
(Note 4) Lrrhen "Feed Hold" is applied during searching or when re-setting opera-
tion is performed during searching or after searching, re-start Ehe
program re-start operation frorn the beginning
However, after search completion, resetting operation in the MDI node
is according to the parameter No. 045: CLER.
(Noce 5) When the program re-start SI^l is 0N, the cycle start is ignored.
(Note 6) Perform manual operation with "Manual Absolutett ON before and after
the machining.
(Note 7) As a rule, the t.oo1 cannot be returned to a correct posit |on under the
following conditions.
i) When the tool is operated manually with "Manual Absolute" OFF.
ii) when the tool is operared wich the machine ro6t and Z-axis
ignored.
iii) When the mirror image is used.
iv) When the coordinate system is noE set at the beginning of a
program in the incremental mode.
v) I,rhen manual operation is performed in the course of axis move-
ment for returni-ng operati-on.
Vi) When the machine lock is released after directing the program
re-start under machine lock conditions.
vii) When the program re-start is commanded for a block between the
block for skip cutting and subsequent. absolute command b1ock.
viii) When the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted after
completion of searching operation.
However, for (3) above, resetting operation is possible in P type for
the ON-OFF switched blocks. At this time, maintain the mirror image
signal in the same conditions as during inEerruption. rn any case, it
should be noted that no alarm is produced.
(Note 8) When no specified block is found, P/S alarro (No. 60) occurs.
(Note 9) When a move conmand is given with MDI before axis movement afcer com-
pletion of seareh operation, P/S alarn (No. 99) is produced.
(Note 10) "RSTR" flashes at the lowermosE part of the CRT. display screen until
Ehe last axi-s completes returning after the program re-starE is com-
manded.
(Note I l) When the 4th axis is a rotary axis, the reference point return direc-
tion is rr-rr, and G28, G30 or subsequent incremental couunand is given
just before a block for which re-start is commanded, the absolute
position of 4th axis may deviate 360 degrees.
(Note l2) When an absolute pulse coder is provided, no operation for reference
poi-nt return is requi-red when poTrer is turned ON or emergency stop is
released.
-263-
$
a
5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt x
l) Move amount E
u r6.rdr Relation
l-fachine lock Machi-ne tool does not move when this sisnal
turns on.
Interlock Machine tool does not move when this sienal
turns on.
Mirror image Interrupt functions on the plus direction by
plus direction command, even if this signal
turns on.
Display Relation
Absolute coordinate value Interrupt pulses are not added.
Relative coordinate value Interrupt pulses are not added.
Maehine coordinate value Interrlrpt pulses are added.
{
.r.
*
?
:5i
-264- E
5
?
d) Residual move amount (DISTANCE TO GO)
The handle interrupt move amount ls cleared r"rhen the low speed reference
point return ends every axis.
5.6.3 High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis
l[hen the lnput unit and output unit are different from each other, the machlne
coordinate value (MACHINE) does not always become 0 when the high-speed
reference point return (G28) i-s executed on the axis in which the handle
interrupt move amount is not 0. However, the reference polnt return end signal
is output even ln such a case. (The devtation of the nachine coordinate value
is maximum 2 pulses when the high-speed reference point return ends.)
If the handle interrupt ls done during the reference polnt return, lt is pos-
sible that the reference point return end signal ls output, even if the nachine
tool does not return to the correct reference point yet.
-265-
6. TEST OPERATION t
I
6.1 AllAxes Machine Lock
When the switch is set to the MACHINE LOCK position, move conmand pulses are
suppressed. Consequently, the position dlsplay is updated as specified by the
program, but the tool does not move.
This function is used to check a program.
OFF
(Note 1) When a G27, G28 or G30 command ls specified, the tool does not go to
the reference point and the REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED does
noE go on.
(Note 2) The M, S, T and 2nd auxl-liary function (B) are executed.
6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
When the switch is set to 0N position, the axis does not move during manual/
automatlc operation.,r
Position display updat.es as if the axis were moving.
SINGLE BLOCK
When the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operatorts
panel, M, S, T and B function operations are locked.
This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch.
(Note) M00, Mol, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed, even if the switch is on.
-266-
6.4 Feedrate Override
With this dlal, it ls posslble to overri-de the feedrate designatdd by the pro-
gram.
The rapid traverse override switch of lO0"A, 502, 25il and, Fo is provided. When
the rapid traverse rate is 10 n/min and this dial ls set to 50y", actual rate
becomes 5 n/nin, t'Fo" is a constant value specified by the mnchine tool_ builder.
Thls function is available in the following movements.
t) Rapid traverse by G00
2) Rapid traverse durlng canned cycle.
3) Rapld traverse in G27 and G28.
4) Manual rapld traverse.
5) Rapid traverse in manual reference point return.
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
If thls sv/irch is set to ON in the Cycle Operatlon, the feed rate specified by
the progran is ignored and becomes as follows:
OFF
Prograu Conrmand
Rapid traverse burton ON/Opf'
Rapid traverse Cuttlng feed
Rapid traverse button 0N Rapid traverse I'Iax. JOG feed rate
Rapid traverse button OFF JOG feed rare (Note 1) JOG feed rate
(Note l) This speed can be ser to the rapid traverse rate by settlng paraneter
RDRN No. 0001.
-267-
6.7 Single Block
This function stops the machine after executing one block of the program.
t) Set the single block switch to ON.
OFF
Single block
One block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If
the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the
execution is stopped again.
(Note 1) For G28 and G30, the single block function is effective at an lnter-
mediate point
(Note 2) I! a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of O,
@, and (0 shown below. When rhe single block function is
eFfective a-points O or @, the feed hold lamp lights.
t!)
F------- +?
(D @
t
G)l ,A
I'
I
/A
- .- Rapid traverse
.'-..-..-..-------.-...* Feed
(Note 3) Single block stop is not performed in blocks conraining M98P_; M99;
and G65. However, single block stop is even perforrned in a block
with M9BP or M99 command, if the block contains an address other
than O, Nir P.
-268-
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
EMERGENCY STOP
This button ls locked when pressed. Although it varles wlth the machlne tool
builder, the button can usuaily be unlocked b-y twisting Lt.
(Note 1) EI"IERGENCY sroP interrupts the current to the motor.
(Note 2) Causes cjf trouble must be removed before the button ls released.
7.2 Overtavel
When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the nachine tool linit
switch' or when lt enters , the stored stroke linit inhlbltion area spectfled by
the setting data or the program, an OVER TRAVEL ls dl.splayed and the tool slows
down and stoPs. In this case, press the reset button to reset the alarrn after
moving the tool to the 'safety directlon by manual operation. For detalls on
operation, refer to the operatorfs manual of the machine tool bullder.
-269-
8. WHEN ALARM 4RlsEs*
Check the following items i-f normal operation cannot be done.
1) h''hen error code is displayed on the CRT
If an error code is displayed, refer to APPENDIX 9 "List of Error Codes" to
check the cause of the error. If the error number ranges frorn 000 t'o 128,
the error is related to the program or setEing data. Correct the program or
the setting data.
2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT
There are cases in which the system is executing some process and it seems
like the machine operation is stopping. Refer to Maintenance Volume,
Section 2.4 rrCNC slatus display".
3) Refer to Maintenance Volume, Chapter 2 "Troubleshootingrr.
-2lo-
$ ttt.tt '
9. PART PROGRAM STORAGE & EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
The following preparatlon is necessary for the part program storage and edltlng
operation.
l) Set the reader/puncher.
2) Set the data on reader/puncher. (See il.3)
3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY).
Some system doesntt provide this key.
4) Set the operation mode to EDIT rnode.
5) Press the PROGRAM key and display the program.
g.2 Registering Program to Memory R\
f\U)
9.2.1Registering with MDI key \
l) Select EDIT mode. \
2) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
3) Key in address 0.
4) Key in the prograrn No.
5) Push the [-ttqsRT I key.
With the above procedure, the program No. is registered to the memory. There-
after, key in respective words of the program and press the [fnS-nT I key to
register them.
9.2.2 Registering from NC tape
1) Se1ect EDIT or AUTO uode.
2) Set the NC tape on the tape reader.
3) Push the PRGRM button.
4) lJhen there is no program No. on the NC tape or when the program No. is to be
changed, input a program No. (This is unnecessary if there is a program No.
on the tape and lt is not to be changed.)
i) Key in address 0.
ii) Key ln the program No.
5) Push l-Nut I key.
9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory (B)
0222 . M30; n?1?1 Mn?.
rrv4,
- 27r -
9.4 Program Number Search
trrlhen there are many programs in the memoryr one of them can be searched.
or97 2
- 272 -
9.6 Deleting All Programs (9)
To delete all programs registered in memory.
l) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
2) Press the PRGRM button.
3) Kev in address O.
a) xey in I:1, lTl, [-tl, l-tl, and Fl and push the t DELEr 1 button.
.gi
t'1 ;Punching a Program
ER ER
Program t (z)
Q)t
LF CR CR
(Note 3) If the feed of 3 feet is too 1ong, push the TeAil button to stop punch-
ing feed holes nidway.
(Note 4) pushing the I RESETI iutton stops punching.
9.8 Punching All Programs
To punch out all the registered programs in the memory.
l) Make the tape punch unit ready.
2) Set the push code by setting parameter.
3) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
4) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
5) Key in the address 0.
- 27_1 -
6) Key in Fl, [-tl, l-e l, l-tl, l-tl, and l-srARr lbutton
3 feet of feed holes I foot of spaces
Program Program
Fp.
- - /o/\
\/o)
I
rogram rogram
Object sequence
number
- 274 -
c) Select the program number to which the sequence number to be searched for
belongs.
Program selected
Range searched
M98 P5678
N8888
Turn on the protect k"y, execute the same operation as the registration of NC
taPe lnto memory, and the reglstered progran and NC tape will be co1lated.
1) Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO).
2) Lock the protect key.
3) Load the program tape to be collated into the t.ape reader.
4) Push PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
5) Push fINPUfl burron.
6) When the tape contalns several programs, collation ls performed rrntil ER (7")
is encountered.
- 275 -
{
(Note I) A rnismatch during collation generates rhe alarm (p/s No. 79). :.'
'1
(Note 2) If'the above operation is executed wi th the protect key released, the
r
program will be registered into the memoryi the prograrn will not be
j
co 1lated. +
:
:
9.11 Insertion, Changing and Deleting the Word ,.1
a)\ N CURSOR
rusn tnef+ I
'tcey
tr TTEE E
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor
displayed below the address character of a selected word.
It:
- 276 -
.
o) vusn cne CURSOR .
burron
I-T_l
N1234X100 . 0z L250; S5 6; N56 7BM0 3 ;
E tilEE
'-1-
=-J
The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; trrie cursor is dis-
played below the address character of a selected word.
(Example)
Scanned here.
r--l EDIT
r-;t
c/ Keep pusnlng cne CURSOR .
or the CURSOR .
key to make a continuous search.
[Fl
. PAGE key ro display the following page
d) Push the|-+_l and search the first
of word the page.
PAGE
e)-lf'Push the r:*l key to display the preceding page and search the first
word of that page
f) Keep pushing .n" ffi
tvtt+
o. ffi key ro display one page afrer anorher.
-217 -
2) Word search
A specified word is searched for from the current position in the forward
direct ion.
a) Kev in address S.
:
b) Key an I H Til . f-t]
I ano I F l.
.l .. I
O I 1 0'0 N 0 0 0 I X L 2 . 3 4 3 Z I 5 . 6 7.; c 0 I X I 2 5; M 0 4
*
i
(r
$::
-218- ..{
't
I
a) Merhod I
Press th" I ngSET I key when the EDIT mode is selected and E.he program
screen is selected. f,he program will be displayed from its head after
completing the heading.
b) Method 2
Execute a Program Number Seareh.
c) Method 3
Set the mode select s\^rirch ro
a Push AUTO or EDIT.
d Key the0. PRGRM keY.
() in
@ Push the u"r.
ffi*
g.11.2 lnserting r*rorU ( I )
\u/
T15 to be inserted
Nl 2 34xl 00 . O21250; S1 2 ; N5 57 8M03 ;
To be searched for
1) Search for or scan the word immediately before the insertion location
2) Key in T (an address to be inserted.)
l-r I . l-tl
Keyinlrlandl. t
r:r LJ-l'
4) ru"tt I rllsFill tey.
PRMRtrl W NL?5/.
Wt
NI23/ xLn.A Zlm i
s12 :
t66?Er 1tr3 ;
j422. ,
z
N}1. T
EDIT
Before Insertion
-279-
PRmRFf1 0ffi8 N123
Wj
N1234 X1uB.6 Zrm Tl5 t
s12 ;
t'66'Ul ttt3 ;
j@.,
z
EDIT
After Insertion
By a push on "INPUT" k"y instead of ttINSRT" continuous words can be inserted
according to the setting of parameter (No. 18, EDTB=1). However, finally,
press ttrNSRTtt or t'EOBtt key.
(Example)
Key i" col t iNpurl xI23. t rNpurl y4s6. t iwuil Froo Iroal' cotxt23.
Y456.F100; can be inserted at a time.
(Note) The last word qE a block can be inserted as follows:
lTlt1 (instead tTtil
Key in zt00 of 2100 [ rNSRr lt
r.gj lrtlsnnrl. rhe resulr is
l;6; |
the same. )
/(d\
9.11.3 Changinsaword (
\u/\t)
To be changed to Ml5
Modified program
-280-
9.11.4 Deleting . *rrd ( 8)
UI
Nl 234X1 00 . 0zI250T I 5; S I 2;
21250 to be deleted
l) Search for/scan the word to be deleted.
2) Push the l-onrEr I butron.
N I 23 4l x I 0 0 . 0 z L 2 S 0 r I s M r 3 ;l s I Z ;
deleted
ffi1
Pushing the I flR I and the I DELET I key deletes up to an EOB and causes rhe cursor
l_"* I
to move to below the address character of the next word.
e.11.6 Detetins arcars ( 8 )
\u/
The area from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified se-
quence number is deleted.
Current searched word
(word indicared by
the cursor) N2233 to be keyed in
I
I I
N1234M10;M15xl0 0; Tt2;N2233'S12;
Area to be deleted
1) Key in address N.
2) Key in, 2, 2.3, and 3 in this example.
3) Push the l-5ftEt I key. The program up ro the N2233 block is deleted. The
cursor moves to the address next Eo the deleted block.
- 281 -
P,n
I i,)l
'j
i'g.lZ
\__
Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
EDIT
(Note l) If N12 is desired qgt lo be inserted in the next block in the example
above, push tft" FELET-l key ro delet Nl2.
(Note If Nl00 is desired to be inserted to the next block instead of Nl2 in
the example above, key in N100 and push fgf,fgRl key. Wirh rhis, Nl00
is registered, and the initial value is changed to 100.
9.13 Background Editing
This function permits background editing regardless of mode selection and CNC
nnn.lirinnc (in automat.ic operatlon or not, etc.). No alarm which takes place
during background editing affects foreground operation. Conversely, background
editing is not'affected by an alarm in foreground.
-282-
9.13.1 Registration from MDI
l) A push on the soft key "BG-EDT't after pushing El
". the right side on the
program screen displays the background editing screen.
Ql,{=.
FiUT|]
,-*.1;\[;"lf-_-][_-lE;;1
ADRS.
NUTO
':1i4::..j
5: -- 1.
-283-
9.13.2 Registration from CNC taPe
Registration operation is the same as r^Iith the foreground editing operation
method, but in this operation, the Program is registered to the background
editing area. The background edit end is required to register the program into
the foreground program qemory like the back ground editing operatj,on.
t) l-01 TProg;mNolf INPUf-l or [-rNpurl : It is registered from CNC Tape.
2) [BG-ENp ]
9.13.3 CNC tape punch
CNC tape is punched in the same procedure as in the foreground operation. As
far as this function is concerned, it is possible to punch out a program belng
selected in foreground as we11.
OE I Prosr"' No.l l-srenrl : The specified program is punched out.
@ E [=;te3l l-sreRrl The whole program is punched out.
(Note In background editing, it is possible to edit programs other than a
1)
program being selected in foreground. If an attempt is made to edlt a
program being selected in foreground, BP/S alarm (140) occurs. On the
contrary, if an attempt is made to select a program being edited in
background, in foreground (program number search and program access by
external signal), P/S alarms (059, 078) occur in foreground.
(Note ,\ No program can be input/output by the external start signal (MINP) or
by the I/O device external control during the background editing.
(Note J) For the background alarm, a P/S alarm similar to one which is seen
during foreground program editing occurs; however, "BP/S" is displayed
on the data rinput line of the background edit screen in order to
discriminate between background and foreground alarms.
This alarm is reset, automatically by editing operation (some input
operation) .
(Note 4) background editing is carried out, a vacant area (not used) may be
When
present in the program memory. This area cannot be used as program
memory as it is. Therefore, it is necessary to compress program memory
in order to eliminate such a vacant area. This program memory
compressing operation can be performed by a push on the soft k.y
ttC0NDNS" or ttRESETt' on the foreground program direcEory screen.
(Note 5) During background editing, all programs cannot be erased.
To assist programming in EDIT mode, the following menu is displayed on the CRT.
1) When G is keyed in, the G code menu is indicated on the lower half of the CRT
s creen.
2) htren a G code selected from the menu in (t) is input, the standard format of
the one block corresponding to the G code is indicated.
For example, when G is keyed in after inserting N102, the G code menu dD
shown below. is indicated on the CRT.
-284-
PROGRtrI'1 NPB NWI38
8L% ,
N10G92ruYAz3t
r@ W xlw. Y-fi. t
bFa
./
Gffi : POSITiSIIi
G81: 1i1.g1A 1P1.
FA2: CIRCLLAR IH_. ClJ <O)
GA3: CIRCLL-CR IH-. Ccl.t <O>
@4 : DITELL
l.r_t'1. G
ilt I
The G code menus after G04 can be sequenrially indicared by pushing rhe lTl
ot l-+l k"y.
For example, when selecting G0l, key in 0 and l, and rhen prr"n rlrsnr-l
but ton. I
At this time, G01 is inserted to the memory as shown below, and the standard
format of the G01 block is indicated on the CRT screen.
@1 X(Z,Y)_
tl_ s_ T_
4re.
EDIT
EDIT
-285-
'.)^'^'
..g.q.-Program Loading by TEACH lN Mode
P0 0----- {P
t^
I
t
I
I
I
o
rz
PRIERF}T OLZU rW
CRELATILE) (AESO-UTE)
x 3.ffi x 3.ffi
Y 23.T23 Y 23.723
z 4.fi z -a.ffi
OIZU t
N1 69 XtWY8ZIZzffi,
f Gm Gg >gEP5 Y2Tf8 t
fS m1 Z-fr FW t
t.]4l'@i
z
Are.
Tlt{D
-287-
9.16 Conversational Programming with Graphic Function
9.16.1 Programming
l) Depress the PRGRM function button. The screen will be displayed shown as
follows if the other program has not. been entered.
If the other program has already been entered, the currentlY selected
program will be displayed on the screen wi th the usual format.
PRGAI1 W IAM
S OT
EDIT
Fis.9.16.1 (a)
2) After inputting address O and the program number of the newly registered
program for entry, depress the EOB key. When desired to entry the program of
program No. 10, forFinstance, depress the EOB key after inputting 0, 1, 0 by
key operations. A new program is then entered.
3) L{.hen depressing the soft key "IAP" on the screen of Fig. 9.16.1 (a), G code
menu shown as following in Fig. 9.f6.1 (b) is displayed on the screen.
PRIERFI1 wla vm
Gffi : POSITIONING
GP1 : LINEAR IPI-.
G@ : CIrctLtrR IPL. C1,J <o)
GA3 : CIRGIAR tPL. CO! <0)
B4 : U,ELL
G16 : CFFSET \JALLE SETTII'G <C)
61? : X/ Pt-$E
G18 : Z< PLSE
Gi9 : YZ PIAE
PB : IFrchl
@1 : I,ETRIC
@11 : REF. POINT RETLRN CtEg<
nm'
EDIT
-288-
screen of G00 is shown in t.he following Fig. 9.16. I (c).
When inputting anything by key operation, the detailed screen of the
standard format is displayed. (See following Fig. e.16. i (d) )
c@GG6
x L@. Y 56. -GGGG
XY
_z (x, Y,:, )
z
-H OFFSET NO, ,' HF
t1 ,' R14
JI
1/
B/' JK
P8
EDIT
E.'-'-rlnn
Fig. 9.16.1 (c) Fi9.9.16.1 (d)
H OFFSE f NO.
l1 r' "
J.
7/
B
ull
E'B{,lnf-_.1
Fi9.9.16.1 (e)
b) With screen 9.16.1 (e), depress the INSERT key. Thenr orr block of data has
registered in the program nemory. G code menu in Fig.9.16.I (b) is
displayed on the screen, and another block of data is permitted to 'be
entered, so repeat the operations from (4).
?\
After the registration of all programs is completed, depress the leftmost
soft-key S] The programs that have been registered are then displayed on
the screen, converted into the conventional format. Depress the RESET key
to return the programs to the program head.
-289-
:,1?ff
PROGRRh owlg tW
WLA t
frtw eaa xraa. Yffi. :
tffi t"t?.2 ;
gI
EDIT
Fis.9.16.2 (a)
2) After allowing the cursor to travel till the heading of the block for which
confirmation is desired on the interactive conversation type screen, depress
the soft key rrIAPrr, and then contents of its block are displayed by changing
them onto the inte;:,active conversation type screen. (See following Fig.
e.16.2 (b))
When contents of a block are displayed on the interactive conversarion type
screen, eontents of its next block can be displayed on the interactive type
screen by depressing the Page Key | * | (for instance) on the screen of Fig.
9.16.2 (b). Besides, by depressing the Page Key | + I as the same, contents of
one block before can be also displayed on the int.eractive conversation type
screen.
B/
ull
Fis.9.16.2 (b)
-290-
Replacement of block
Allow contents of the block desired to replace to be displayed interactive
conversatj-on type screen. After allowing the cursor to traveI till the
heading of the block one desires to replace on the usual format screen, this
can be executed by depressing the soft keyttIAP"; or from the beginning, by
depressing the soft key rrIAPrr and bringing up the display of the interactive
conversation type screen, and then repeating to depress Page Keys l-t-l or Fl.
When replacing data, except G code which will be a headline, input new data
by depressing the INPUT key after allowing the cursor to travel to the data
required by using the cursor key and inputting a numerical value by
depressing the numerical keys on Ehe interactj-ve conversation type screen.
When replacing the G code itself which becomes the headline, depress the
soft k.y "G.MENU", then the G code menu is displayed. Accordingly, select
the G code required and input its numerical value by operation keys. For
instance, when replacement is required to t.he feedrate, the G code menu
shows G0l, so input 0i by k"y operation. After that, when depressing the
soft key "MENU", the detailed screen of G codes that are already input will
aPPeare.
Accordingly, refer to 9.16.1 (l) and input dara.
When having completed the above replacing operations, depress the ALTER key.
By this operation, one block of the program can be replaced just as it is.
,\ Insertion of Block
Allow to display the block just before the section desired to insert a new
block by using the Page Key on the interactive conversation type screen. On
the usual format screen allow the cursor to travel till just before the
section desired to insert a new block by using t.he Page Key or Cursor Key.
After allowing to display the G code menu by depressing the soft key
"c.MENU", refer to item 9.f6.l (4) and 9.16.1 (5), and inpur data of a new
block. When completed the above inputt.ing operations for the data of one
block, depress the INSERT key.
By this operation, data of one block is inserted just as it is.
?) Deletion of a Block I
A1low contents of the block for which deletion is desired to display. After
that, by depressing the DELET key, contents of the block displayed in
deleted from the program memory.
On the screen, the contents of the next block is displayed with Ehe
interactive conversation tyDe screen.
9.17 Number of Registered Programs
Number of registered programs: 125 programs (Standard; 63 programs)
9.18 Part Program Storage Length
-29r-
9.19 Editing Operation Using Full Keys
-292-
Note 1) The cursor does not stop within parentheses.
Example) ( XI00. Y100.) ;
ThE-cursor does not stop at these posidions.
However, when the parentheses are not a pair, the cursor moves as in the
following:
Cursor forward
I LTo' jto9-tti" .rrr"or does not stoD here.
Cursor backr"rard
( x100. Y100. :
- T---:f- ,ihe cursor srops here.
Exaurple) Keying in WI{ [AB [/|2]LERO I#3ll is rhe same as rhar of WHILE IABS
[/lzl LE ROUND t#31 l. A1so, rhe program is indicared in rhis
manner.
e) Control out/in
Comments can be wri-tten in programs.
Example) O000i (FANUC 0 SERIES) ;
Note l) The words of macro cannot be abbreviat,ed. However, do not input them
by dividing them into two or more sectors since they rnay be converted.
Note 2) The ttOtt, tt tt can also be input. Hotrever, cautions must be taken when
inputting them by dividing thern into two or more sectors.
Note 3) No period can be input af ter the rort and rtNrr even within the
f
parent.heses ( ) .
-293-
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
10,1.1 Setting and display of tool offset values (function t eyr lottretl)
Parameter IOF (No. 0001) selects absolute input and incremental lnput.
I) Input of absolute offset value.
a) Push [oFsgTl tey. (For the soft key, press the soft key lorrsEfll when the
other screen is displayed.)
b) Push a PAGE button to display the requlred page where the requlred offset
number is given.
FFSET W }'W
ttr. mTA Fn. mTA
_ffir LA.W ffi A-W
w -L.ZzB Atg ta.effi
n3 a.w af. -n-w
g.em
w a.w atz
ffi n.w 813 A.W
re a.m a14 8.2ffi
w7 6.m Bls a-?ffi
m g.w aL6 0.828
MTLFI- POSITIO.{ (RELRTIL)
x a.w Y s-m
z
l.O. Wl
s.w
=
I'IDI
FFSET W |W
t'tr. mTA h0. mrA
ar? g.w Jffi !5.M
a1B A.W m 8.W
619 A.m @7 s-wB
w a-m @ a.wB
at 6.WB @ A.?n
@. a.zffi a3a 6.w
a3 a-m 431 z.nB
w4 g.w 632. a-m
rcTLH- PGITISI (RELATILE)
x s.w
g.w Y 8.w
z
htr. m=
MDI
-294-
2) Input of incremental offset value
Input an increase or decrease value of the offset value
a) Shift the cursor to the position of the offset number to be changed.
(Same as l)-c))
b) Input the incremental value (input with declmal point is al-so posslble)
with the data input keys.
c) Push t INPUT-I button. ih" ittcremental value is input, and the offset value
corresponding to the sum of the incremental value and the current offset
value is indicated. This value indicated is the new offset value.
(Exarnple) Offset value currently set z 5.678
Value input (incremental value) :' 1.5
New off set value z 7.178 (= 5.678 + 1.5.t
(Note) When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the neht
offset value does not become effective immediately. It becomes effectlve
after the H code specifying the offset No. corresponding to it is de-
signated.
1O.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: lFFRAfvtl)
MDI
STEP/HANDLE
2) Push key.
3) Push a PAGE button to display the setting parameter.
PFRFT'ETER @mt@B
(SETTII.G 1)
-FEu( =6
RELn/= A
TIIN = O
IS[l = I (6:EIA lsu )
IlGl = A (g:l'tl Ir.0{)
l/o =g
r.o. RE\x =
4) Push a CURSOR key and move the cursor to the iten to be changed.
5) Input I or 0 according to the following description.
a) REVX
Setting X axis mirror image
I : X axis mirror image 0N
0 : X axis mirror irnage OFF
b) REVY
Setting Y axis mirror image
I : Y axis mirror irnage ON
0 : Y axis mirror irnage OFF
-295-
' -}.'.\ |
-(Note) If X and Y axis mi.rror images become effective, the X and Y axis movement
directi,on in AtlTO mode is opposed.
However, the movement direction in manual operation or the movement {
direction between the reference point and the intermediate point in auto- i'{{
matic reference point return are not opposed. i
-1
c) TVON {
TV check when registering a program from a paper tape into a memory.
1 : Perform TV check 1
0 : No TV check
d) rso
Setting code, IS0 or EIA, when punching a program in the memory onto a
*
nrnar l-tna
I : IS0 code output
0 : EIA code output
e) INCH
Setting a program input unit, i-nch or metric system
1 : Inch
0 : Metric
f) L/o
- Setting reader/puncher device for prograrn input/output with reader/puncher
/' interf ace.
Select a device of a channel I set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and
STEP2 (parametaer No. 0002) and BMTED (parameter N0. 0552) .
Select a device of a channel 1 set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STP2
(parameter No. 0013) and BMTE1 (parameter No. 0553) .
Select a device of a channel 2 set by parameGrs NFED, and STEP2
(paramet6,er No. 0050) and BRATE2 (parameter N0. 0250).
SeIect a device of a channel 2 set by parameters NFED, and STEP2
(parameter No. 0051) and BMTE3 (parameter No. 0251).
g) ABS
c.-.l+nL'i-^
owrLgrrarrS between absolute and incremental comrnands in MDI mode.
I : Absolute command
0 : Incremental command
h) sEQ
Qarrino eequence number insert.ion automatically when registering a pro-
gram in the memory using the keys on the MDI panel. (See section
III-14. ll for details)
I : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
0 : Does not perform aulomatic sequence number insertion.
i) Setting the tape format of l0/il series conversion.
I : Tape format is converted.
0 : Tape format is not converted.
6) Push I INPUT I key. Each paramerer is set and displayed.
-296-
15. MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION
15.1 Outline
The amount of machine movement according to the stress other than motor driving
power in servo off condition is reflected to various coordinate system of CNC
control unit.
In CNC control unit, the nachine movement is followed up as if move conmand r{ere
com-anded. So, when the servo po\^rer is turned on, the uachine position and the
NC coordinate system value match each other.
So, by using this function, it is possible to move the machine by hand using the
mechanical handle. For this function, PMC is required.
15.2 Follow-up Signal *FLWU
-330-
14.2.3 Tool path drawing
1) Depress the soft key lmFfl after depressing the function key GRAPH/AIIX
the following will be displayed on Ehe CRT screen.
wt rcnLz
xY a.m
g.w
z a.w
S BT
flJTO
-329-
14.2.2 Details of graphic parameter
1) AXES . Set the plane to plot.
AXES=0Select(1)
AXES = 1 Select (2).
AXES = 2 Select (3).
AXES = 3 Select (4).
AXES = 4 SelecrJ5).
AXES = 5 Select (6).
The rotating angle (horizontal , vertical) for isometric di.spaly of 5 and 6
is fixed at 45" in both cases.
2) RANGET (uax.
), (MrN. )
x- )(=
J= l=
l=
Set the maximum value/ninimum value of graphic range desired to display on
the screen.
o Setting range: 0 - +9999999 (unit: 0.001 nm or 0.0001 inch)
In this case, the value of MAX needs to be greater than that of MIN.
3) SCALE Set the graphic ruagnification
Setting range: o 100000 (unit:
0 - ioooo0 (unit: 0'01
0.01 tine)
4) cRT .ENTER
[=
|=
/,=
Set the coordinate value on the work coordinate system at graphic center.
Llhen MAX and MIN of MNGE are set, the values will be set automatically .t
once drawing is executed.
s) PROGRAI"I STOP
Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partially dispaly.
The value is cancelled automatically once drar.ring is executed.
6) AUTO ERASE
1. Erase .the oldest drawing automatically when the automatic operation is
started under reset condition
0. Not erase automaticallv.
*
-328-
Example
Gc (=30mmJ0mm)
P= s oT
t'oI
2) Depress the CURSOR [L [Tl t" move the cursor to t,he desired posirion.
3) After keying in the nun r-ir data, depress ttre lffil, by which the graphic
parameter is set.
4) Perform the above steps 2) and 3) repeatedly to set all graphic parameters.
-327 -
As shom in the example of the above flgure, the maximum drawing range will be
the area of approx. 144 nrn (wldth) x 108 mn (length).
In case the range to draw ls greater than the maxlmum drawing range, the drawlng
magnification is used.
The drawing ruagnificatl-on is 0.01 to 100.00 times, which is usually determined
as follows;
o Drawing rnagnificatLon = Drawing magnification (H),
or drawing rnagnificatlons
(V), whichever is smaller
o Drawing magnification H (length on program to horlzontal dlrection axis)
o Drawing magnification V = o/
= R/(length on program to vertical direction axis)
c : 144 nrn
B: 288mn
The drawing magnification is always based on the center of screen.
magnification
Program
Gc
After magnification
In case the tool path will not exist near the center of screen, enlarging the
screen will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the drawing range.
To avoid such cases, the following four graphic parameters are prepared t
" RANGE x (MAx.) (range: X MAX.)
"O RANGE x (MIN. ) (range: X MIN.)
MNGE Y (MAX. ) ( range : Y llAX. )
" MNGE Y (MIN. ) (range: Y IIIN. )
O RANGE z (MAX. ( range :
) Z I'{AX. )
" MNGE Z (MIN. ) (range: Z IIIN. )
With the above parameters, the center of screen (Gex, Gcz) can be calcuLated as
follows;
Gcx=X(MAX.)+X(MIN.)
Gcz=Z(MAX.)+Z(MIN.)
The value will be 0.001 rnm or 0.0001 in. depending upon the input unit.
The graphic origin and graphic center point will not be changed even if the work
coordinate origirr is changed.
In other words, the work coordLnate origin is always consistent with the
graphic origin.
-326-
14. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
It is possible to draw the prograrmed tool path on the 9-inch cRT screen, which
makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the path
on the screen.
rn addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.
Tool path drawing is possible on six coordinate sysEems.
t
I
54 mm
72nm
?2 mm
54 mm
I
I
-325-
C
:
{
Library screen
Software key
RET
-324-
3) Delete
Press the soft key "DELETE". The cursor indicates File No.
DELETE
FILE
e Input File No
(?)Press the soft key "EXEC".
Delete the file with File No. designated by FILE NO.
After execution, subsequent files are shifted up one by one.
4) File search
Press the soft. key "SRHFIL". The cursor indicates File No.
SEARCII
FILE NO. = I
NUM.
EDIT
-323-
(Example)
FLOPPY A
Input Program No. Program No. turns into the file name.
Press the sof t key t'EXEC".
At this time, if no File No. is entered, punch a program at the last of the
registered file
rf F1le No. is entered, the program is punched at File No. designated.
However, i-f File No. already in use is designated, subsequent files are
deleted and .File Name is registered as ttFCA3".
when all programs are punched in one fi1e, input -9gg9 to program No.
-322-
Screen format No. 2
DIRECTORY (rLoPPY)
NO. FILE NAME (METER)
0001. PARAl"lETER 20.5
0002. OFFSET 40.7
0003. ALL. PROGMM 32.2
0004. 00002 7.5
0005. 00003 t0.2
0006. 00004 2.6
0007. o0010 4.9
0008. o0020 11.8
0009. o0030 5.5
EDIT
SRHFIL
5) In screen format No. I or No. 2, when other soft keys than "PROGR.M,t are
depressed, the display is as shown in screen format No. 3.
Example: I{hen the soft key "RLAD|' is depressed:
Screen format No. 3
- 321 -
Slide the write-protect key
in the dbection indicated
by the arrow.
This function displays the directory of floppy cassette for file input and
outpuE
13.7:1 Display
The directory is displayed in the edit and background edit nodes. Following 1S
the display operation.,_
1) Display a normal pfogram screen.
2) Press the soft key "FLOppy" or selector key "pRoGRAM" twice.
3) Screen format No. I is displayed.
Screen format No. I
-320-
il
#
Note 2) When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request for cassette
replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, but reset after the cassette
has been rePlaced.
r:
-319-
13.4.2 Offset data input
The following operation enabl-es offset data input from the cassette to the CNC.
1) Selecr the EDIT mode.
Z) Select the of f set screen by pressing I-brSET-l tey.
3) Operate as same as program input operation.
4) The input offset data will be displayed on the screen in the form of offset
value input by prograrnming (GI0), after completion of input operation.
GIOP R :
5) Select che ofGt data display screen and check that. the offset dara has been
correctly set.
13.4.3 CNC parameter input
Thg following operation enables CNC parameters input from the cassette to the
CNC.
l) Press the. EMERGENCY STOP butron on the machine side.
2) Select the paramerer screen by pressing l-pAffi.l t.y.
3) Set the setting data P\^IE to 1. Alarm PSI0O is displayed ar rhis rime.
4) Operate as same as program input operation.
5) NC parameters are input to the memory for NC parameter by this operation.
Normally, alarm PS000 will activate after completion of paramet.er reading.
6) Set the serring dara pWE to 0.
7) Turn on the NC power over again if alaru ps00o activates.
8) Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
13.5 File Deletion
The file in the cassette can be deleted as follows:
1) Select EDIT node. -
2) Push I-PRGRI,I l.
3) Turn off the protect key r@\
\ lt ).
4) Key in address N.
5) Key in file No. I to 9999 to be deleted.
6) Push ttre l-sffiTl tey.
With this operation, the k-th file input in (5) is deleted.
Note I) After the k-rh file is deleted, file Nos. k+l to n change to Nos. k to
n-I.
Before deletion After deletion
t to (k-r) I to (k-1)
k Deleted
(k+1) ro k ro (n-l )
Note 2) Deletion is possible only when the write protect key of the cassette is
set to the upper posirion (RECORD side).
13.6 Precautions
i
:{
-318-
13.3.2 Offset data output
The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette.
l) Select the EDIT mode. i
2) Select the tool offset data display sereen by pressing OFSET key.
3) Press the START key.
4) Specify file search-out when required.
For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.3.3 CNC parameter output
The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette.
I) Select the EDIT mode.
2) Specify file search-out when required.
3) Select the parameter display screen by PARAM key.
4) Press che START key.
For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.4 Data Input Operation
Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette to the CNC.
-317-
c) N-9999
The file next to that accessed just before is searched.
d) N-9998
When N-9998 is designated, N-9999 in (c) is automatically
a file is input or output. This condition is reset by the inserted each time
(a), (b) or (c) or reser. designation of
Note I) when files exist in the cassette, designations of
the same effects. However, when the files do not exist N0 and NI resulr in
an ararm is indicated if Nt is designated (since there in the cassette,
file). When N0 is designated, an alarm is not indicated
1s no first
is searched regardless of the existence of file. since the head
conduct
searching when writing the programs from the beginning of the cassette N0 head
after cancelling a new cassette or a1r of the "fil.".
Note 2) An alarm is not in'uoediately indicated in the cNC
"*i"ai'g
unlt even when an alarm
occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or the like).
P/S alarm 86 is indicated when the inpui/output operation is performed
arEer Enat.
Note 3) The same result is obtained both by sequentially searching
specifying Nos. Nl ro N9999 and by firsr searching one of the files by
and then using rhe N_9999 searching nethod. The searching tj_me Nl ro N999b
shorter in the latter case. is
13.3 Data Output Operation
Note r) when P/s alarm 86 occurs during program output, the cassette i,s restored
to the condition before the outpuc.
Note 2\ when program output is conducted after
NI to N9999 head searching,
new f_ile is output as the designated n-th position. rn this case, the
n-1 files are effective, but the files r to
deleted. rf an alarm occurs during output,"rt", the old n-th one are
only the 1 to n-I files are
restored.
Note 3) The cassette is provided with the wrj.te protect
slide.
the upper position (RECORD side) and inserr the cassetteset ro
the slide to
rhe adaprer.
rn thie condition, make sure that the red lamp lights. Then, start
output operation.
Note 4) Head searching with the file No. is necessary when
the cNC to the cassette is again input to ir," cNCthe file output from
memory or conpared
with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, irnme4i3g"1, after the
file is output from the CNC to the cassette, record the file No. on the
memo sheet of the cassette.
Note 5) To efficiently use the memory in the cassette, output the program by
setting parameter NFED of parameter No. 0002 or 0012 to 1.
:
{
:
.a
-316- r
..1r"r,
The unlt of data, which ls lnput/output between the cassette and the CNC by one
input/output operation (pressing the l-REID-l or l-?ffiettl k"y), is called a ttf iletr.
When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette, for ex-
ample, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file.
Files are assigned file numbers I,2,3r4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
When the program is input from the cassette, the file to be input first nust be
searched.
For this purpose, proceed as follows:
l) Select EDIT or AUTO node.
2) Push l-Pnffil t"y.
3) Key in address N.
4) Kev in the file No.
5) Push ttre l-rllPur I tey.
The following head searching occurs aecording to the nurnber speeified:
a) N0
The beginning of the cassette is searched.
b) One of NI to N9999
of rhe file Nos. I to 9999, the designated flle is searched.
-3r5-
12. DATA OUTPUT
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output
data format is the same as the parameter tape format.
1) Setting the data ousput interface
Set the data output interface in the parameter.
Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casserte, or ASR33/43.
2) Setting the output code
Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to set-
ting data.
3) Set the mode to EDIT.
4) Press PARAM.
5) Press START key.
6) Parameters are started to be output and "OUTPUT" is displayed during out-
Put t ing .
7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key.
After the RESET key is pressed, output of rernaining parameters cannot be
started.
-314-
11.9 Clock
Time is displayed on the status indication line (line l5) and thg parameter
setting I screen.
(SETTING I)
REVX = 0
REVY = 0
TVON = 0
rS0 =0 (O:ErA 1:rSO)
INCH=0 (O:MM 1:INCH)
ABS =0 (0:INC 1:ABS)
sEQ =0
Note) The time at the status indication line (1ine l5th) is not displayed when
rhe "NOT READY'I is displayed.
- 313 -
HOLE PATTERN : Menu title
An optional character string can be displayed within 12
characters.
BOLT HOLE Pattern name
An optional character string can be displayed within l0
characters.
The machine tool builder should program character strings of menu title
and pattern name by custom macro, and load thern into the program memory.
Enter the desired pattern number by keying operation.
r--] -;l:
I TJIINPUT l, for example
2) Pattern data display
When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are di.splayed.
-3L2-
,i*Ffi;i
b) Usage
When the command of M02 or 1,130 is executed, the total number of machined
parts and the number of nachined parts ar re dbv one.
Therefore, create the program so that t ar -eJ eggg e- 4-*-eJeJJ- !-lne
the _proce i"_9!_ ot. -par_t.-iE
xs
Furthermore, even if the M code set to Ehe pararneter ry
count.ing is made in the sinilar manner.
Also, it is possiJrle- to-*itle counting even if the M02 or M30 is executed
$e:e
When the number of marc.--h1_-ed parts reaches the number of required parts'
signal is output to the PMC.
However, when the number of require-d. paEts is ttOtt (inf init{ maximum), no
outPutismade.Fordetai1s,Sachinetoo1builders.
11.7 Alarm Display (Function t<ey. IEAF'M])
When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displdyed at bottom, pressing the ALARM
button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below.
See APPENDIX 9 for the meaning of the alarm number.
I'EsSME
CL.RI,I WEB IWB
514 GrR 1gq-n : +X
536 o|.,|:R TRT.E- : +Z
Note) When an alarm occurs the alarm message is usually automatically displayed.
11.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Display
l) Pattern menu display
a) Select an offset or custom macro variable cRT by depressin,
Et#rlo.r.
b) Depres"
m key again.
- 311 -
I
PART COUNT : Indicates the number of parts. I^Ihen M02 or M30 is executed,
it is increased by +I. To preset the PART COUNT to "0",
press P and CAN key.
RUN TIME Indicates the total run time during automatic operation'
excluding the stop and feed hold time.
To preset the RUN TIME to "0", press R and CAN key.
(It is not preset Lo "0" by cutting off power. )
CYCLE TIME : Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, exclud-
ing the stop and feed hold time.
This is automatically preset to ttOrr when a cycle sEart is
performed at reset state.
(It is preset to "0" by cuEting off power.)
1 1.6.2 Parameter setting screen
PrnflIER (m1 h@
(SETTIhG 2)
pt = 1 (O:DISAH 1:ElRHl)
g
=
-RElr4
TNPEF= A
PffiT TgTfl- = I
Pffif FFT|JIROE A
PART CIII.IT = 15
Ftl.t rric 1Ht6r,l cYol Tll anlgtE!;
fO. RE\4 =
29:3:l:43 FDI
lPffi*4 llFGll ll ll I
Note 1) Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of ttMtt andttStt of run
time is valid from 0 to 59.
Note 2) Even if a negative value is set to the parameter nunber 0779 of the
total number of machined parts, a positive value can be displayed. Do
not set a negative value since the value is decremented by one when
counted.
-310-
iv) Actual rate display
The actual feedrate per ninute of machine can be displayed on the current
display screen and program check screen by setting the parameter (No. 0028
DACTF).
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:
n4
Fact = r (fi)z
i=I
where,
n : Number of axes
fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axls or rapid
traverse rate
Fact: Display speed
The display unit: mm/urin (Input in units of mn).
inch/rnin (Input in units of inch. However' t\^to places
below the decimal point are displayed.)
Note 1) In the case of per revolution feed and thread cutting, the dtsplay speed
is displayed by the speed per minute rather than that per revolution.
Note 2) In the case of shift of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of
deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that
time. For example, when the shift speed of rotary axis is 50 deg/rnin,
the following is displayed: 0.50 INCtiiM
Note 3) Display is made only during automatic operation on the program cheek
screen.
When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are
displayed on the screen. '
11.6.1 Actual position screen
-309-
ii) In the relatlve coordinate system
(It can be displayed by pressing soft key I REfl. )
t"* lf*-
-l[*'11-ll-l
29: 18:21 l'lDI
-308-
PRMRFfl CHECK W2 IW,
Wt
ira egz ><B Y8 F8 ,
t@ w xLffi. YLa. t
t{fi @l Z16. FL6.5 t
(PFSA-UTE) (DIST TO GO) (G)
'/, -ts.na x 6.@A W VA 6?
'( -5.%6 Y a.w GL? g9 Gg
z -15.n4 z a.qaa G% w 64
A -a.sw A A.AW G94 GS
GzL t=Jg
trPHS
P o ttr657
RDRS.
f,JTO
-307-
r
111) Command values entered fron the MDI or nodal values prevlously speclfied
are displayed.
(It can be dlsplayed by pressing soft key llmt l.l
il
The program check screen is displayed by pushing the CHECK soft key. The
display includes the page for a program block in memory being displayed at
present, th'd present positi-on, and modal value previously conuranded.
-306-
11.3 Command Value Display (Function key: [FR-GF-M)
G41
BA
Ef RUTO
l'-*''11""...-l[_*;lnn
-305-
a) PRoGRAM NO. USED The number of the programs registered (including uhe
subprograms) .
FREE The number of programs which can be registered ad-
ditionally.
b) MEMORY AREA USED The capacity of the program memory .in which data is
registered (indicated by the number of characters).
FREE The capacity of the program memory which can be used
additionally (indicated by the number of charac-
ters) ..
C) PROGMM LIBMRY LIST Program Nos. registered are indicated.
Also, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting the
parameter No. 0040 (NAMPR).
0n the program name display screenr. the program number and program name are
displayed.
Note l) Always register a program name beEween the control out and control in
codes irnmediatelv after the program nunber.
oDfrl (aaaa.
-__-
.
-304-
11. DISPLAY
A progran number and a sequence number are displayed at the top right ' as seen
in the photo.
PRMRtrI W T:BL?9.
@;
N1@ G92 \i<9 Yg Zn. t
N116 m1 6n Y-79. ,
lll?fj Z-',n. t
N138 Gl? BI1 GB1 X1.?.s IJaP. FAEB
Nr4E H2 Gi39 I-1?.5 ; '
N158 Bl1 m3 X-1?.5 Y1?.5 R1?.5 ;
N16g GA1 X-8. t
N1'7g GEP }u7.5 Y27.5 p7.5 ,
N1E[| GA1 X-15. ;
N1*t G@ ru YA t
ADRS.
IIJTO
Proceed as follows:
I ) Select EDIT rnode.
2) Push the PRGRM button.
(For sof t key, press scf t tey [TnCml l. )
3) Kev in address P.
4) p"strlrllpurlbutton.
Or re-push the PRGRM button instead of the step 3) and 4).
EDIT
-303-
#
6) Shift the cursor to the offset number position in the same way as in setting
rhe of f ser value l-6-1 r---T,1
Reference
tool
I
Fixing point
(Note) rf either
H "'E n", is depressed insread or
l-9-l
t.r in 6), the
or Y axis relative coordinate value is input as an offset value.
.:
,t
!t
-302- T
CPERITO?'S FFIL OLW IW3B
SKIP : IOFF El.l
Sltg-E B-OCK :
-B-OA< FF l0.l
lGCtlll LOO( : IFF S{
DRI Rtfi : IFF S{
PROTECT KEY : TPROTECT RELEffiE
FEED F0-D : IOFF til
t"-"".lffi--il_-1l---1n
c) Push [Tl or fTl key, and march rhe cursor ro the position of the desired
switch.
d) Push l-Fl or [Tl key to march the mark ! ro an arbitrary positlon and set
the desired condition.
2) Jog feed operation
a) Push the key to display the screen of the software operatorrs
panel.
b) Select JOG node
c) Jog feed can be performed by pushing the desired arrow
key.
Jog rapid tr.averse can be conducted by pushing the
key together with the arrow key.
Note l) When the CRT indicates other than the software operatorrs panel screen,
jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed.
Note 2) The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set
with parameters (paramerer Nos. 0f30 to 0135).
3) General-purpose switches
Eight optionally definable switches are added as an extended function of che
software operatorts panel. The name of these switches can be set by para-
meters as characEer strings of max. 8 charact.ers.
For the meani.ngs of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine
tool builder.
/ 10.8 Tool Length Measurement
I/
--l:I Setect a reference tool, and attach the reference tool to the rnachine fixing
point (or fixing point on the workpiece) manually.
2) Display the relative coordinate positlons by depressing l-pOS I and PAGE keys.
tAl
3) Preset the Z-axis relative coordinate value- to a.by depressing |)L |ana
-zero
l-aAN lkeys.>Ar z Zlaoecn^T*#''on' Cozt) a,t.,t.1 | I
-301-
10.5 Pitch Error Compensation Data
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the
machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the
machine model. rf it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced.
In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
10.6 Data Protection key
A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of
parE program input and editing.
For where the kev is mounted, refer to the manual issued by machine tool
builder.
1O.7 Software Operator's Panel
I^lith this function, functions of the switches on the machine operatorrs panel
can be conducred from the CRT/MDI pane1.
The following can be conducted via the CRT/MDI panel.
a) Group I : Mode select.ion
b) Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapid traverse
c) Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse g"o"irtor feed axis, selecgion of manual
pulse magnification xl, xlO, xl00
d) Group 4 : Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
e) Group 5 : optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock, dry run
f) Group 6 : Protect key
g) Group 7 : Feed hofd
Whether to operate from CRT or uachine operator's panel can be determined bv the
parameter OPGI to OpGT (No. 017) for each group.
I) Setting of mode selection, etc.
t-- EE-r
a)- Push | ALARM
| .."::t-1.I.
b) ry"n ffi key to display rhe necessary page
(rr can be"I1a
disptayed by pressing soft t"v ftpft-l]l
-300-
f) in a__p.ereqgter value by data input keys.
Key
s) Depress lT?u-il. The paramerer value is input and displayed.
h) After all parameters have been set and confirmed, turn to the setting
screen, and return the PWE setting to i
i) Depress the RESET key ro release the alarm condition. When alarm No. 000
has occurred, turn off the power supply and t,hen t.urn it on, otherwise Ehe
alarm is not released.
?) Setting of parameters using a tape
This method is effect.ive only when the reader/puncher i.nterface option is
combined. Parameters can be input from the tape reader or teletypewriter
ASR33/43.
L N
7o
L
F
N
F
L N
F
L
F
Vo (
(a) (e)
N I 0 D L
0 0 0 0 I 1
F
* \+
(b) (c) (d)
Fis. 10.4.2 Parameter setting tape format
a) Punch 7" (ia case of ISO code) or ER or CR (in case of LF of EIA code) at
the start of the tape.
b) Punch the data number following address N next to the end of block code
(lf i.n ISO code or CR in EIA code) .
c) Punch Ehe data to be set after address P. Punched data at the address
should correspond to the parameter number punched at address N.
d) Punch the end of block code. Continue steps b), c), d), as required. A
data number following address N must be punched at the start of each
block. Leading zeros of parameter data following P are omittable.
F LF and Z (in case of rso code) or cR or ER (in case of ErA code)
t )--f) Punch
finally.
t
E
t
(rf codes.
Data input from the tape is finished with'the input of these
?. Parameters not speclfied on the tape renain unchanged even if the para-
meter setting tape is input
f The Parameter setting tape prepared by the above procedure can be input
according to the following proeedure.
i) Ser PWE = I (CRT/MDI lanet).
ii) Select EDIT mode on operator's panel.
iii) Select PARAI'I on CRT/MDI panel.
iv) Turn on INPUT button on CRT/MDI panel.
v) SeE PWE = 0 (CRT/MDI panel).
vi) Turn on RESET key on CRT/I'{DI panel. (Turn on and off the pov/er of CNC,
if alarm number 000 occurred.)
Note l) The tape stops traveling when any of the following alarus ls detected.
i) TH or TV (with TV check rurned on) is in pariry error.
ii) An address other than N and P was input.
iii) An N or a P value is disallowable.
Note Ll Depress RESET k"y, if iE is desired to stop setting from the tape
halfway.
Note 3) A part of parameters doesnrt become effective unless power supply is
turned off (when alarm No. 000 occurred).
Note 4) Parameters related to the reader/puncher interface must be set from MDI,
etc. before inputting paramet.ers from the tape.
-299-
10.4.2 Parameter setting
1) Setting of parameters by using buttons on CRT/MDI panel
paqE-l .
a) Press I n"r.
LEGI
Press page key to display setting parameter page.
(Ir can be displayed by pressing sofr key fSETmil.)
PFRtrTER W IWB
(SETTI}S 2)
jPtE = 6 (A:DISAE-E l:EMB-E)
REU4 = A
m. PlEi
TT-] _
- in Ii jn ft--
Press cursor button and set the cursor ro PI^IE. Key l rurut l, and
parameter is able to be written. NC is placed to P/S alaru No. 100 con-
dition.
b) Select tp_MD.lnFde (or ser rhe emdrgency stop condition).
c) Depress I PaneU I key ro display parameters on the CRT screen.
d) Depress the page key to display a desired parameter Daqe.
(It can be displayed by pressing soft key lTExr l.l '
I
t PARFTTM W IefEN
f0. mTF hn. mTA
_mt wtffi e6tl w
w. wffit taIz w
@3 Wt @13 W
w ww7 @74 W
w6 w^r @ts w
ffiwr@t6w
w7 wwffi! eftt1 11111111
w@w@raw
wE w e3L9 W
@74 Wtn @ @
I'O. @11 =
MDI
|IPRR4 il r-----l
--_-.|
lloaruos ll u l r
-298-
10.3 Custom Macro Variable
The common. variables (/l|100 to /1131, #500 to /153t) can be displayed on the CRT by
the following procedure.
\NRIRH-E W |WEb
fn. mTA fo. mTA
_l@ rw 1@ A
T61 6 LW $EM
L@. -W LLA L$Pffi
143 6 ItI 1
IU t?sffl.L LIz A
166tL3f,
16 a L14 mffi
fn6115A
rcI,.H- PGITIO.I (RELFTIl,E)
x s.w Y 6.WE
z s.w
hE- L@ =
lrDl
When the absolute value of variable exceeds the value 99999999, rr**********tr is
displayed.
l) Display
a)\ s .IMENT-I .butron.
Push t;:-:_ |
I urJlr I
b) Display the desired page by pAGE butron.
(It can be displayed by pressing sof t key I I,tecno-l.l
2) Serring
a) Display the desired page.
b) Move the cursor to the desired variable number. (Sane as item 10.i (l)
(c) )
c) Key-in the variable value by data i.nput kev.
d) Push I-INPUT lkey, and rhe input value is displayed. '
3) Setting the coordinate value to variable
a) Move the cursor to the desired variable number
b)J* [-fl tr.. X axis) , (ror Y axis) or l ; | (for Z axis) while pushing
E lLl
k.y.
c)-pustr'I INpUT I burron. The relative coordinate value for X, Y or Z axis is
input and displayed on the variables.
10.4 System Parameter
-297 -
15.4 Caution
1) Work coordlnate system revlsed by follow up becomes effective {rom the next
automatlc operation.
2) Inch/uretrl.c converslon functLon can not be used with this function.
.:
;'Jd;*t4t*ciuz '
, / .,.
, ".r*;ii!'i"'
-331-
16. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF OO-MB
The CRT/IDI panel of 00-I{B consists of a CRT display (14" color) and keyboard.
Contents of display and operation by k.y input are completely different
depending on whether the CNC screen or I'ffC screen is displayed on the CRT/Mnf
panel. In this manual, the operation when only the CNC screen is displayed ig
described. Refer to the manual of machine tool builder for MMC screen.
Start/
output
key
Program
edit key
Input
key
Function key
-332-
*63ii'#
^:'!6*^ .t
16.1 Display
Press "CNCtr key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen when the MMC
screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/I{DI panel. The bnC screen
consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the
part that is surrounded by the fraue at t.he bottom right, and its display
contents are the same as displayed on the 9" CRT display of O-MB. Therefore'
the screen selecEed by function k"y, page k"y, cursor k"y, and soft key is
displayed.
The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display
contents are position data, operation time (optional)' modal data,. and S, T
command value, as shown on the screen in the Fig. 16.1. Display -iterns of this
section cannot be changed by the screen selecEion operation.
However, its display contents are always renewed.
l-|r-rrqnntrlrl[ti-ll--l
Fis. 16.1
16.2 Operation
Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT
display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently
arranged on 00-MB. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0-l'IB.
The page key t *, cursor key t *, and selection key <- + on the software
operatort s panel are of combined use wich the function k.y. Press the
corresponding key for use as a page key, cursor key, and selection key on the
software operatorrs panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the
ttFUNC" key as the function key.
Five keys on the righc half ten keys are effective for the varl-able section, and
Ehe other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position
display data in the fixed section.
-333-
-i
:-
t
a
a
:l
I
.l
:
tt
,,.,,, , -:i!#
.::.1
IV MAINTENANCE
I
{
i-
*
1. FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
When a fuse blows ln a part of the CNC unit, find and correct the cause of the
failure and replace the fuse. Fuses used in the CNC unit are as follows:
1.1 Specif ication of Fuses
5A fuse (Fl4)
5 Afuse (Fll,Fl2)
-337-
1.2.2 Additional l/O 81
I
1.6A fuse (F5l)
.
\
b
j
DI/DO connectors
t
1.2.3 InPut unit
*:n ll+ll
:\J l-l
>n
-'t'
For input unit Y
without servo q
-l
:L
F--l .-
rpz
=b
;
G
.;
-_
-338- *
s
t
T
t
f
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 General
-339-
4) Check phases of operation:
Has the operator been properly instructed?
Has the operator been rePlaced?
Is the operator familiar with the program?
Does the program finish too early or vras lt lnterrupted?
Does the program contain an incremental command?
Is the tool compensation value correctly set?
If the tool compensation value was changed, was it done correctly?
Does the rnachine change to another mode of operation?
Is the block skip function used correctly?
Is the tape set correctly?
Are there any tape coding errors?
Has the machine tool been operated incorrectly.
5) Check punched tapes:
Is there dirt on the tape?
Are there any folds or wrinkles on the tape?
Are joints normal?
Did the program previously run norrnal1y?
Was the tape copied from a Baster tape?
Was it the punched tape?
Was the tape correctly punched?
Is the tape puncher normal?
I{as the wrong tape used?
Is the puncher in good condition?
6) Check the program
Is the program new?
Was the program crated according to the OPEMTORTS UANUAL?
Are addresses in the right order?
Does the problem occur in any specific block?
Does the problem occur in the sub-program?
Was the list of tapes created for checking?
7) Check for changes in operation
Has any change or adjustment been made in the operation procedure?
Has a fuse been blown?
Is the NC in the emergency stop state?
Is the machine tool ready?
Is the NC in the alarm status?
Is the MODE SELECT switch set correctly?
Is the switch on the tape reader set correctly?
Is the override switch set to the zero position?
Is the NC in the nachine lock status?
Is the NC in the feed hold status?
8) Check the machine itself:
Is the machine properly installed?
Does vibration occur during operation?
Is the tool tip normal?
Is there ahy offset due to tool exchange?
Is there sufficient backlash compensation?
Are there distortions in any part of the machine due to temperature changes ?
Was the workpiece measured correctly?
Was the measurement nrade at a constant temperature? (1 meter of steel
changes lOp in length at a temperature change of loC)
Are the cables normal (bent, broken or damaged)?
Are the signal lines and power lines separated?
':
; r-
it
'z
s
*
-340-
9) Check the lnterface control:
Are power lines and NC cables nounted separately?
Is the shield normal?
Is a noise suppressor attached to the relay, solenoLd, and notor?
2.3 NC System Check (No tools required)
1) Check control unit external conditions:
Is there damage to the cabinet?
Is the CRT/I"IDI panel normal?
Is the filter clean?
Is the reader clean?
Is the door of the reader closed?
Has operatlon nade with the door open?
Check that chips accurnulated on the cabinet did not fall inside when the door
was opened.
2) Cheek inside the control unit:
Is there dirt in the control unit?
Is the fan motor normal?
Is there corrosion?
3) Check the power unit:
Is the unit correctly connected?
Are all fuses OK?
Is the circuit breaker normal?
Is the voltage htithin the allowable range?
Are the shield and cable duct grounded correctly?
Is the wiring path OK?
Are all terml-nals fully tightened?
.4) The grounding
Is the grounding connectLon OK?
Is the shield ground OK?
5) Check all cables:
Are cable connectors fully pushed ln?
Are there any abnormalities in internal cables?
Are there any abnormalities in external cables?
Are there any scratches, bends or breaks?
6) Check prlnted circult boards:
Are all PCBs mounted properly?
Is the plug connector OK?
Are physlcal condltions normal (no distortlons, etc.)?
What is the PCB editlon?
Are connections between prlnted circuit boards good?
7) Check the CRT/MDI unir:
Do the push buttons operate norrnally?
Is the tape cable nornal?
2.4 CNC Status Display
When l-t seems that the CNC is executing nothing during cycle operatlng status,
the current status of the CNC is displayed on CRT screen at the diagnostic
number 700, 701 or 712 by pushing the DGNOS burton.
-341-
F'
Diagnostic llo.
0 7 0 I CRST
CRST: One of the followlng: The reset button on the MDI panel, energency stop,
or remote reset is on.
Diagnostic No.
,,
0 I STP REST EMS RSTB CSU
Indicates automatic operation stop or feed hold states. These are used for
troub leshooting
STP : The flag which stops the pulse distribution. This is set at the follow-
ing condition.
(a) External reset signal has been turned on.
. (b) Emergency stop signal has been turned on.
(c) Feed hold signal has been turned on.
(d) Reset button on the CRT/IDI panel has been turned on.
(e) The mode has been changed to the manual node, such as JOG, HANDLE/
STEP, TEACH IN JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE.
(f) Alarm has been generated. (Soure alarms may not set the flag.)
RESET: This is set when one of the external reset, emergency stop, or reset
button has been turned on.
EMS : This is set when t.he emergency stop has been set on.
RSTB: This is set when the reset button i.s on.
CSU : This is set when the emergency stop has been turned orlr or when the
servo alarm has been generated.
2.5 Display of Position Deviation (DGNOS No. 800 - 805)
Diagnostic No.
0 8 0 0 SVERRX (X axis)
0 8 0 I SVERRY (Y axis)
0 8 0 2 SVERRZ (Z axis)
-342-
Position deviation value of X, Y, Z l4th, 5th and 6th axes in order.
Diagnostic No.
2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point (DGNOS No. 820 - 8251
Diagnoscic No.
0 8 2 0 ABSMTX (X axis)
0 B 2 1 ABSMTY (Y axis)
0 8 2 2 ABSMTZ (Z axis)
The machine position from the reference point can be displayed on the CRT screen
as fol1ows.
i'
mTLH_ PtlSITI0.t @24 tWffi
(RET.CTII) CABSA-UTE)
x 19.868 X 18.86A
Y -?.*t Y -7.W
z -27.?L6 Z -27.7L6
t. (FM{IF) (DISTFTG TO E])
x 5.141 X O.qBB
Y -48. LZ? Y A-zBB
z L. r73 Z A.@B
T;_ll;-l|;_]T**ll-___l
-343-
#
I
V APPENDIXES
APPENDIX 1 TAPE CODE LIST
-347-
IS0 code EIA code
1
Uharacter 8 6 5 q ? I Characte r 8 7 6 5
Meani-ng
7 3 z I
.- o o o o 1- o o o * Positive sien I
o o o o Neqative sign {
o o o o Colon
o o
o o o o o o o o o Optional block skip
o o o o o o o c Period (A decinal
poinE )
It o o * Sharp
o o , Dollar sien
& o o o & o o * Ampersand
o o o o * Apos t rophe
* o o o o * As teri sk
o
, o o o o , o o o o o >t
Comma
o o o o o * Semicolon
o o o o * Left angle bracket
o o o o o o * Equal
.?
o o o o JsRj-eht ansle bracket
o o o o * Ouestion mark
o
G
1t
o Commercial at mark
o o * Ouotat ion
I
o o o o o Left brace
o o o o * Risht brace
(Note 1) *: when read in the 'significant
information section, the codes are
ignored.
(Note 2) ?: when readr in the signi.ficant information section, an alarm is
generated. However, it is stored in the meruory.
(Note 3) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
(Note 4) codes with incorrecc parity cause che TH alarm. But they are ignored
without generating the TH alarrn when they are in the comment section.
(Note 5) A character wi-th all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm
even in EIA code.
t
t
r
-348-
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
Circular inter
' - {l - , _ }' _t
polation c17
{:33}'
(c02, c03)
GI8
f G02't
lco:l x ,- [=-_i' _t
,
' -,{} - * _ i' -,
Gl8
{:33 }
-349-
;#
sation C J
Yo40
(c40 - c42)
H: Tool-'offset No.
G49; Cancel
Tool length
offset B
(c03, c44, c49) {:ii}t:n}ii -
{:[]t:n]
H: Tool offset
':,
G49z Cancel
Inch/metric Inch input : GzO
conversion Metric input z G2l
(G20, G21)
Reference poin
return check
(G27 )
-t-/"
Start point
lntermediate Doint
Skip function
(c31)
i:Tl'-s*
-350-
functions Illustrations Tape fornat
Custom acro General format c6s HnP/llQ/ljRi/k;
(c55, c66, c67) R/i k;
c6sHnP#IQ/ij Modal call
m : Specifles macro G66 P
functlons with G67: ...
-; Cancel
01 ro 99
/11: Variable number
of operatlon
result
#j: Variable number
used ln
oPeratlon
(or constant)
/lk: Variable number
used in
operatlon
(Meantng)
lfi=llt @ #t
+
Operatlon IIm
-t
Z point
-351-
#i.
Table 1 (a) Linear axis {in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric
input)
Increment system
lou Standard o. 1u
Least input 0.01 0.001 0.000r
increment
Least command 0.01 0. 001 0. 000 I
inerement
-352-
Table 1 (b) Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
lou Standard o. 1u
Least input 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
i-ncrement
Max. rapid 240 000 n'n/min 100 ,000 rnm/min 24'000 mm/min
traverse *1 '
l:
p
F'
|:i
-3s3-
:FG
Table 1 (c) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
Standard
-3s4-
Table 1 (d) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
I0u Standard o. 1u
Least input 0.0r 0.00r 0.000 l
increment
Least command 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
increment
Max. programmsflg +999999.999 +99999.999 19999.9999 uur
di-mension
-355-
-!G qF
Increment svstem
Standard 0.0001 deg
I
t
i:
;
t
Z
it
t
-356-
.t
APPENDIX 4 MONOGRAPHS
The leads of a thread are generally incorrect tn 61 and 62, as sholrn ln Fig, l,
due to automatic acceleratlon and deceleration.
Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of d1 and 62 in the program.
-357-
F. {G
a
,tr (V = lgpp/sec )
y: !Q6p/sec
y: dQ66/sec)
<lr
First specify the cl4ss and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy' a,
will be obtained at C, and depending on the time constant of cuEting feed
acceleration/dece1.r"iion, the 61 value when V = 10 urn/sec will be obtained
at @. Then, depending^on the speed of thread cutting the approach distance
O, witt be obtained ar @ for other speeds than 10 mm/sec.
(Note) The equation of 6-1, 62 is for when the acceleration/deceleratlon ti-me
constant for cutting feed ls 0.
Simple Calculation oll Incorrect Thread Length
An t'att indicates the error allowances. And the "1-lna" follows as below. i
1
;
d - 1- lna (Exanple)
-358-
J ,.1 .l
6
tl o a
6 -.t FI
E
E
O
6
trc
6
dtr {{
eo
;6 &d
76
Y>
oo
tr>
'F9
N-
@
N
^O o
@ Aa
o
(o
N o
(,
@
.ri o .!
.3
!,
C'
o
o
o,
-o d
Ea .9^ .E
,ui Gt E o
.9s E
o i""Ei'
rEc{6 6:
{3
Ec
6zl 2 EeeE 3 Jhh9d
(!
gt
o
I E
o
=a I z
>{r t-
1c;
3?
_q6
I
I
to
.E d>
Ei; I
;
4..^
R\ q)
I
q
3 >:: I
: I
:^
.!9s l-
Rg
-;3 ld
6 Ei
.,o- Ea I
I
>J:
'r il'
I
I
3?
oq
I
I^
l.E
Ec lo
Ei: E
oh
3
ll
E
l'
>J:r! o
@ I
6
N
ll
-359-
i
2. TOOL PATH AT CORNER
I) Descriptfon
Inhen sLrvo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting
or caused by the positioning systern when a servo motor is used) is accon-
panied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path
(too1 center path) and the prograrmed path as shovm in Figure 2 (a).
Time constant T., of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
Yz
Programmed Path
Tool Path -
must be performed carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the t
desired precision. i:
t
In other wo::ds, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical t
precision, the comrnands of the next block must not be read until the
conrnanded feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used to stop the
machi-ne for the appropriate period
2) Analysis *
The tool path shor^m in Fig. 2 (b) is analyzed based on the following condi-
t ions
.
:
a) Feedrate is constant at the block before and afcer cornering.
*
{
i ,1
t
t
t
t
{
!
tt
-360-
b) Thecontroller has a buffer reglster.
(Theerror differs with the reading speed of the tape reader, number of
characters of the next block, etc. )
(Conditions exPressions)
Vxl=V'cos,/1
Vyl=V'sin91
Vx2=V'cos92
Yyz= V. sin q2
n-(4r-{2)=o
(Description of synbol)
V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornerlng
Vx1: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of preeeding block
, Vyr: Y-axis conPonent of feedrate of preeeding block
Yx2: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of following block
Vyit Y-axis comPonent of feedrate of followlng block
. 0 : Cornerangle
tt:. : Angle forned by comrnanded path dlrection of preceding block and X-axis
,!; : Angle forned by connanded path direction of following block and X-axis
-36r-
Initial value calculation
-ttt" ittitial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at
the end of command distribution of the controller, is determined by the feedrate
and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the
following equations:
-362-
3. RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING
When a servo motor is used, the positionlng system causes an error betyeen lnput
commands and outPut results. Since the tool advances along the cornnanded
segment' an error ls not produced ln linear lnterpolation, but when especially
high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, an error is produced
in the radius dlrectlon. This error can be sumnarized as follows:
^r=+
since the machining radlus r (m) and allowable error Ar (rm) of the workpiece
ls given in actual machining, the allowable lirnit feedrate y (m/sec) ls deter-
mined by equation (1).
Since the acceleratlon/deceleration time constant at cutting which ls set by
this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool builder's
i.nstruction manual.
-363-
'q
c) l'lake sure the punched holes of the overlapped cape sections at the joi-nt are
correctly aligned. IIse special care with the feed holes.
fi-t.ll
I
\Jl-.,
Incorect
I
o
Correct
F
d) Trin both edges of the joint to smooth them.
Trim
e) Ilake sure punched holes are not clogged up with the paste.
-364-
APPENDIX 6 STATUS WHEN TUR NING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET
Parameter (No. 045,. CLER) sets whether clear condition by reset or reset
: condition.
o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued.
x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
I tem
When turning power
When reset When clear
on
Other Programs in o o o
data
Contents in the x o: MDI mode x
buffer storage x: Other mode
S, T, M x o o
Repetition x x x
count
specification
(K)
Action Movement x x x
oper-
ation Dwe11 x x x
Issuance of M,S x x x
and T codes a
-365-
Item
When turning power
When reset When clear
on
caEron
of
LEDs
NOT READY x x
(Lights in
emergency stop)
(Llghts in
emergency stoP)
t
BUF Extinguishes o: MDI mode Extinguishes
x: Other mode
REFERENCE POINT x o
RETURN COMPLE- (x: Emergency (x: EmergencY
TION LED stop) stop)
t
S, T and B codes x o o
I'1 code x x x
M,SandT x x x
strobe signals
Spindle revolu- o o o
tion signal
(S analog
signal)
CNC ready signal ON o o
(MA)
LED
-365-
t:
ir
's. I
APPENDIX 7. PARAMETER LIST
1. PARAMETER DISPLAY
1) Press the "PARAM" k"y to select a parameter screen.
2) Key in Address No.
3) Press cursor key or page key to change the screen instead of Address No;
too.
Set parameters to 0 without fail, if their usage is not specified in the
following detailed description.
Parameters dontt always function unless the CNC function (option) is provided, i
even if their usage is specified. Confirm which paraueter options 3re mounted ,l
in advance. 'I
.{
Note) The name of parameters on upper side are used for only T series: CNC
-:1
e'. 1
are used for only M series: CNC for Machining center (0-l[B, I
,l
;l
.l
il
Bit No.
't' F'
-367-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
NFED 1: Feed is not output before and after progran is Ine Daucl ,
output by using the reader/puncher interface. rate is
(Sg.!_ "1" f or FANUC cassette. ) set with *J
0: reEl*ii o"tp"t befd;;;"-a*"ii"r program is ourpur parame ter .i
by using the reader/puncher interface. No. 0552.
(Effectiver(rhen the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
TJHD t: Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG node by manual
pulse generator is possible.
O: Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG mode by manual
pulse generator is not possible
HSLE When the manual pulse generators are provided for
two axis, the axis selecting signal is valid
(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual
pulse generators can not operate.)
0: When the uianual pulse generators are provided for
(The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated
is moved regardless of the axis selecting signal.)
(Note) When one manual pulse generatgr is provided,
set 0 to this parametei
PI'O(Y2, I The shift direction in canned cycles G76, GBl .
0 i -X
0 0 '1- I
I I -Y
-368-
T
I
tt
T
{
xl 0 0
x2 0 I
x4 1 0
x8 I I
-369-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
zux, zttz The reference poi-nt return direction and the back-
ztq3, zl{,4 lash initial direction at power on for X, Z, 3rd and
(0r) and 4th axis i-n order.
l: Minus
0: Plus
-370-
Pararneter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
- 371 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
DMRX GRDX
0 0 0 .+
DMRX GRDX
Bir No.
DMRZ GRDZ
0 0 0 5
D},IRY GRDY
Bir No.
Dl,lR3 GRD3
0 0 0 6
D},IRZ GRDZ
Bit No.
0 0 0 7
D},IR4 GRD4
Bir No.
-372-
DMRX to DMR4 Setting of detecrive mulriplier
Setting code
Detective rnultiplier
-373-
Relationship among DMR, CMR and GRD. (In case of System series T)
Metric system
F
X I r /o.s 4 8000 '&
j
8mm
z I 1 4 8000
Note 1) In thq above table, right side value is in diameter designati-on, and
lett eiae value is in radius designation in X axis.
Note ?\ Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiplY
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for maximum
feedrate.
- 374 -
t*,
Relationship among DMR, CMR, and GRD. (In case of series T)
Inch svstem
ltoving distance Count ing Command Detect rnultiply Capacity of
per I revolu- Axis
(de tec tion) urultiply rario (DlR) reference
tion of motor unit ratio Pulse Pu I SE Pulse
counfer
(Pulse coder) ( 10-4) (CMR) 2000 2500 3000
X 1/0. s I 3 2l+ 6000
0.6 inch
Z I t 3 2 6000
x 0.5 2 I 2000
0. I inch
7 0.5 2 I 2000
Note r) In the above tab1e, right side value is in diameter designation, left
side value is in radius designation in X axis.
Note L) Data in the above table is standard. Conunand and detect nultiply
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for naximum
feedrate.
- 375 '-
Relationship anong DMR, CMR and GRD. (In case of series M)
Metric system
l0 mm i 2 4 r0000
8mm 1
I t 4 8000
6mm I I 3 2 6000
5mm I rI 2 5000
4m- I I 2 4000
3mm I I
I t.5 I 3000
2mm I I I 2000
.'
lmm 0.5 L I 2000
Note l) Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiply :'ij
-.
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is linit for maximuur r:.-
feedrate. .'.
Inch system
Moving dj-stance Counting Command Detect rnultiply
per I revolu- (detection) roult iply ratio (DlR) Capacitv of
tion of motor unit ratio Pulse Pulse Pu 1 S
reference
(Pulse coder) ( 1o-+r; (cl,IR) 2000 2500 3000
counfer
0.6 inch i I 3 2 6000
0. 5 inch I I 5000
0. 3 inch I I 1 3000
0. 15 inch 0.5 1
I 3000
Note 1) Data in the above table is standard. Comrand and detect mult ip ly-
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is lirnit for maximun
feedrate.
- 376 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
E
F
l NOFC ROVE I4FPR
r
0 0 8
EILK OTZN ROVE ADW2 ADWI ADWO
I
BiE No.
F
I EILK l: Interlock is performed for each axis.
(FANUC PMC-MODEL L is necessary.)
i 0: Interlock is performed for all axes or for Z axis
(it needs that No. 012 ZILK=I) on1y.
NOFC l: Offset counter input is not used.
0: Offset counter input is used.
OTZN I: Z axis sEored strok check is not done.
0: Z axis stored strok check is done.
ROVE 1: Rapid traverse override signal ROV2 is noE
effective. (1002, Fo)
0: Rapid traverse override signal R0V2 is effective.
( 100%, 507., .257" Fo)
0 0 0 A
n 0 I B
0 I 0 c
0 I I
t U
I 0 0 V
1 0 I w
t
I t 0 t\
t I I A
-377 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
TMF TFIN
0 0 0 9
TMF TFIN
T code
TF
FIN
L-
I
Parameter
TMF TFIN
setting
l6 msec More than 16 msec 0 0 0 0
-378-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series; Lower : M series) Remarks
Parameter
TMF TFIN
setting
208 msec More than 208 msec I I 0 0
Bir No.
i
I
t--
I
-379-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series ' Lo\iter : !1 series) Remarks
-380-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
-38r-
Parameter No. parameter (upper : T series, Lower
: M series) Remarks
0 I x2
I Fo
x4
I I X8
0 0 I 2
Bir No.
-382-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
ASR33
l:
0:
l:
In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindte CH/CCW
rotation is performed without M05 code output.
In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindle CW/CCW
rotation is performed afcer M05 signal output.
The 2OmA currerlt Lnterface ls used as the reader/
w
puncher interface.
o: FANUC PRR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader
are used as the reader/puncher interface. .-
(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
ZTLK 1: Interlock is effective only for Z axis. Relative
0: Interlock is effective for all axes. parameter is
No.008i
EILK..
1: In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit 1S
set by 2 bits.
0: In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit ls
set by I bit.
(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
Bit No.
0
Plus output for M03, uinus output for
M04.
I I
Minus output for M03, plus output for
M04.
-383-
.::,* i$i
':t1
-384-
,i
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
STDP t: The actual spindle speed and the code are always
displayed.
0: The actual spindle speed and the T code are not
always displayed.
GMCL 1: Cancels the tool geometry offset vector by resetting.
0: Does not cancel the tool figure correction vector by
resetting.
T2D t: T code is specified in 2-digits.
0: T code is specified in 4-digits.
Bit No. 2
-38s-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T serles, Lower : M series) Remarks
Bir No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 r 0
-385-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lo\rer : M series) Remarks
Bit No.
-387-
:{!l'eFfF
EDITB TVC
0 0 1
8
EDITB TVC SQTYP NZMP4 NZMP2 NYMP2 NXMP2
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 | 0
specifications.
TVC I: TV check at the conment.
0: No TV check at the comment
SQTYP 1: The program restart method should be R type. (not
available)
0: The program restart meEhod should be P or Q type.
N)O{P2, 1: Handle feed magnification xl00 is ineffective for
NYI'IP2, X, Y, Z and 4th axes' resPectivelY.
NZMP2, 0: Handlerfeed rnagnif icati-on x100 is ef fective for X,
NZMP4 Y, Z and 4t.h axis' resPectivelY.
(Note) The magnification of an axis whose rnagnifi-
cation xl00 is ineffective becomes xl or x10
by signal MPI.
MPI=1:x10
MPl=0:x I
Bit No, J
-388-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series Lower : M series) Remarks
NCIPS
0 0 2 0
SFOUT NCIPS BCD3
Bir No. to
SFOUT 1. SF is output in S4/5 digit even if gear change
is not performed.
0: SF is output in S4/5 digit on changing a gear.
i
-389-
ma .re: l
APCZ APCX
0 0 2 I
APC4 APCZ APCY APCX
Bit No. 16 *
APCX, 1: When absolute pulse coder detector is optioned.
Y, Z, 0: When absolute oulse coder detector is not optioned
4
tt
3
.t
ABSZ ABSX t
0 0 2 2
ABS4 ABSZ ASSY ABSX f
*a
Bit No. I
;
A3SX, l: Reference point position in absolute Pulse coder &
Y, Z, se ttled . {
4 0: Referepce point position in absolute pulse coder is
not settled.
(It is automatically set to "1" when manual
reference point return is executed. Do not change
the setting without changing the detecEor')
Set "0" without fail when primary field
installation and adjustment and when position
detector exchanging. And execute manual reference
point return after Power on/off.
-390-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
Blr No.
- 391 -
!F'
xl 0 0
x2 0 I
x4 I 0
x8 I I
PRCMSG 1:
0:
On the program check screen, a message fron
is displayed. (not available)
The remaining motion is displayed
PMC
t
PRCPOS I: On the program check screen, the absolute
coordj-nates are displayed.
0: The relative coordinates are displaved.
-392-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
Bit No.
ADW4O ADW3O
0 0 3 0
EACl EACO
Bit No.
-393-
It, | ,,fr,,
, uoo . Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Reuarke
",
l,/rr,tt
t'ACl: Axis setting for PMC axis control
0 0 4th axis
0 I X axis
I 0 Y axis
I 1 Z axis
Irtr
11o. 1
lllr1,,
l. At the time of reference point return, Cf axis
relative coordinate value is cleared.
n. At the time of reference point return, Cf axis
relatiye coordinate value is not cleared.
rll'r
l: Even in the turning mode (signal COFF is closed) in
Cf axis control, the feedback pulse from the
position detector becomes effective.
o: The feedback pulse in the turning mode in Cf axis
control becomes invalid.
Alt11,
,
t: Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set to Gl23 (DGN 123) of
PMC address.
tl. Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set ro cl18 (DGN 118)
(standard specif ications) .
l'ltl
t; In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, c87), the
tool returns to R point level in the course of
drilling. (B type)
t|: In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87), the
tool returns by the retract amount in the course
of drilling. (Type A)
tt\,1
t. In the drilling cycle, the init ia1 point level is
updated by resetting.
tl. In the drilling cycle, no init ial point level is
updated by resetting.
|
^l,ll t. In the tapping cyele, M05 is sent out first when
the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
lt: In the tapping cycle, I'103 and M04 are sent out when
the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
-394-
b=
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
Bit No.
ACMR
0 n 3 5
ACMR LGCM NDSP4 NDSPZ NDSPY NDSPX
Blr No.
-395-
Remarks
Parameter (UPPer : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
X, Y, Z and 4th
NDSP4, Z, \, X, whether the current positions of
axes are disPlaYed or not
l: The current Position is not disPlaYed.
0: The eurrent Position is displaYed.
0 0 3 o
I 0
Bir No.
be 0.001 .
1: The scaling rnagnification incrernent sha1l
The scaling magnification increment shall
SCR be 0.0001.
n.
0 0 J
Bir No. 7
-396-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lohrer : M series) Remarks
Bir No. I 6 5 2
0 I Floppy cassetEe
I 0 Paper tape reader
I I Paper tape reader, etc.
-397-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T seriesl Lower : M series) Remarks
DEC34 = 0 DEC34 =I
:IDEC3 xI9.7 x16. 7
0 0 3 9
M6TCD IGIN IGSK GRST TLSK LCTM GST2 GSTl
Bit No. 32
Following is the setring for tool life management.
te
M6TCD 1: Regards M06 and the same block T code as the next
tool group comrnand.
0: Regards M06 and the same block T code as backnumber.
IGIN 1: Ignores tool backnumber.
0: Does not ignore tool backnumber.
IGSK 1: Took skip signal is accepted only while the tool life
managed tool is in use.
0: Tool skip signal is always aceepted.
GRST 1: Clears all group executlon data at the tirne of
tool reset signal input. (This is the same with
when this operation is performed.)
0: Clears execution data only for the group with
the nurnber inputted from the outside at the time
of tool reset signal input. (Only the group shown
by the cursor positi-on when thj,s operation is
performed from MDI.)
TLSK 1: At the time of tool skip signal input, Group No. is
also entered.
0: At the time of tool skip signal input, the group
eurrently being selected is skipped.
-398-
Parameter No Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries) Remarks
I1
0 r- 64 r- 4
I I t - 128 1- 2
././.---*--.,--,^\
LOCC coMc TMCR RWCNT NAMPR
0 n 4 0
J/
LOCC COMC. TMCR RWCNT NAMPR
W:
6:
-399-
Parameter No Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 0 4
RIN
Bir No. 2
I
ASTCD
I
0 0 4 2 I
ASTCD
I
EQCD
I
0 0 {+
EQCD
I
SHPCD
I
0 n 4 q
SHPCD
l
-400-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
Bit No.
GRPOS 1: The actual position I-S displayed on the graphit only 0TT
screen.
0: The actual position is not displayed on the graphic
screen.
IGNAL 1: Even when an alarm occurs on the other tool post, only 0TT
no feed hold status is reached.
0: When an alarm occurs on the other tool post,
the feed hold status is selected
SBAB l: Head 1 is upper on the conmon screen. only 0TT
0: Head 2 is upper on the conrmon screen.
RSTSW l: The reset key is valid only for the tool post only Ofi
se lec ted
0: The reset key is valid for both tool posts.
-401-
,t
Bir No.
SEPII I: The lst handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent only 0TT
to 1st tool post, and the 2nd handle pulse to the
2nd tool post.
0: The handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent in
parallel to both tool posts.
SP2C 1: GraphiqS;are drawn on a single screen for both only 0TT
tool posts.
0: Graphics are drawn on a separate screen by both
tool posts. 4
i
l
TIST 1: Tool post selecting signal is invalid (HEADI only). .
Bir No. 76 54
'$
;
2
ri'
ti'
T
t
7
!
!,
E
t
?
+
-t
v
E
-402-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
TYI
00
TYO
-1- 1 2nd tool post
TYI TYO
0l not'
-d-t*'oot
I
TYI TYO
l0
TYI
tl
TYO
IFE [: Even when the conditlons for tool post checking are
established, no tool post interference is checked.
n. I.lhen the conditioons for tool post checking are
established, tool post interference is checked.
ITO l: When Offset No. 0 is designated by T code,
interference check ls contlnued according to the
current Offset No.
0: Wtren Offset No. 0 is deslgnated, using T code, tool
post interference check 1s lnterrupted until offset
No. other than 0 ls designated by the next T code.
-403-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
FMLlO NPRV EFMLlO
0 0 9
FMLlO NPRV EFML I O RDIK DILK
Bit No.
FML1O 1: The rapid traverse rate and cutting feed upper liurit
speed parameter increment system shatl be l0 nun/min
or I inch/min.
..g) For 100 m/min, the increment system shall be
10000.
n. As per normal specifications.
NPRV 1: Even when no position coder is provided, the
per-revolution feed command sha1l be valid.
(The per-revolution feed command is converted
automatipally to the per-minute feed in CNC.)
0: When no position coder is provided, the
per-revolution feed command shall be invalid.
EFML 1O 1. The feedrate command (cutting feed) of pMC axis
control is used by I0 times.
0: Standard specif ication.
RDIK 1. The high-speed interlock signal sha11 be invalid
when the each directional interlock signal goes off.
0: The high-speed interlock signal shall be always
va1id.
DILK l. The each directional interlock signal shatl be valid
only in manual operation.
0: The directional interlock slgnal shall be invalid.
Blt No.
-404-
Parameter No Parameter (Upper : T series, Lolrer : M series) Remarks
0:
When the reader puncher interface is used to output
a program, no feed is output before and after that.
When the reader puncher interface is used to output
\
L p
5*e
a program, feed is output before and after that..
RSASCI 1: When the reader puncher interface is used to
input a program, ASCII code is used.
0: When the reader puncher interface is used to input
a program, ISO/EIA code is used.
STP2 l: Stop blt shall be 2 birs in rhe reader puncher
interface.
0: Stop bit shall be I bit in the reader puncher
interface.
PARTY 1: Parity bit shall be present.
0: Parity bit shall be absent.
-405-
{
LBLCD
I
0 0 5 3
LBLCD
I
I
RBLCD
I
0 0 5 4
RBiCD
I
Bit No. 10 I
D D]C il 7
" u(\
$t'
tt -_
'b
.tt
-406- &-
*,
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
CI,IRZ
0 I 0 I
CMRY
cl'IR3
0 I 0 2
CI',IRZ
CMR4
0 I 0 3
cuR4
-407-
Parameter No. Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
2 I
4 2
l0 5
20 10.
SPLOW
I 0 d
SPLOW
THDCH
0 I 0 9
4
I
ts
-408- .?
l
E
t'
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
SCTTIM
0 t l n
SCTTIM
SCTTIM Set the delay timer for checking. the spindle speed
reach signal. This sets the time required from
execution of the S function to the beginning of
checking the spindle speed reach signal.
Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: msec)
Spindle speed J
reach signal.
distribution
}{BUFl
0 I t I
}{BUFl
}{BUF2
0 I I 2
I,IBUF2
-409-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
PSORGX
0 I I 3
PSORGZ
0 I I
OFCMP
0 I 1 7
H4NO+HZNO
tt TLCMP
0 I I 8
NUMHG
OFMAX
0 I I 9
TLMAX
0 I 2 0
-4r0-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
settlng method
Second digit: H4NO
First digir : HZNo
MOLHPG
I
0 t 2 I
MOLHPG
I
OFSNO .l
0 2 2
I
I
- 4II -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M seri_es) Remarks
GRPAX
0 I 2 3
0 t 2
PSRNQI
0 1 L 5
PSRNQ2
0 2 6
PSRNQ3
-4L2-
I
I
0 I 2 7
PSRNQ4
UPKY
0 I 3 0
UPKY
DWNKY
0 I J I
DLINKY
RGTKY
0 t 3 )
RGTKY
LFTKY
0 I 3 J
LFTKY
FWDKY
0 t J
FWDKY
-4r3-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
BACKY
0 I 3 5
BACKY
KEEHHE
Setting value: I to 6
+z 3
-z 4
+;t 5
-5 6
(Exarnple)
ro *x,
when serri"c
K m qlro -X, FFI to +2,
f-il Trl f
-t,
l*i1.. I ulto +3 anal . I
to -3, set as follows
0 I 6
RTDKY
0 I J 7
LTUKY
RTDKY=7, LTOKY=8
-4L4-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries) Remarks
a) In case of T series
UPKY, Sets the jog feed axes and directions on the
DWNKY, software operatorts Danel corresponding to
RGTKY,
LFTKY trEHH;.'
Axis, direction Setting value
+X t
-x 2
+Z 3
-z 4
(Examo 1e )
b) In case of M series
URKY - Set the jog feed axes and directions on the
LTUKY software operatorts Danel corresponding to
EEtrEtr Eil EE
Axis, direction
teY?'
Setting value
+X I
_X 2
+Y 3
-Y 4
+z 5
-z 6
+4 1
-4 8
(Exanple)
When setting to +2, to -2, to *X,
-4r5-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
NSWI I
0 L 4 0
NSWI l
i \
NSW88
0 2 0 J
NSW88
SIGNAL0 : IOFF ON
SIGNALI : OFF fON
SIGNAL 2 : OFF ION
SIGN.trt 3 : IOFF ON
SIGNAL 4 : IOFF ON
SIGNAL 5 : I0FF ON
SIGNAL 6 : IOFF 0N
SIGNAL 7 : OFF ION
AUTO
-416-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
-4I7-
Character-to-codes Correspondence Table
I
o/
J 074 037 Percent
t
K 075 & 038 Ampersand 1
I
I
L 076 039 Apostrophe i
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Risht parenthesis
o O79 F 042 Aster j-sk
P 080 + 043 Plus sien
0 081 044 Comma
{
-4rB- .:
I
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
CCLMP
0 2 0 .+
POSTNi
0 2 0 5
POSTN2
0 2 0 6
POSTN3
0 2 0 7
POSTN4
0 2 I 2 I
INTPLN
-419-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 2 I 3
AO\IMDR
0 2 I 4
AOVOR
I
0 2 5
AOVTH
'1
f
-420-
1
1
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower': M series) Remarks
0 2 I 6
FIDN
Fmax i
AF= 100n
MCDCNT
0 2 I 9
MCDCNT
la
i]MGCDO
0 2 2 0
i II}IGCDO
UMGCD9
0 2 2 9 ----.-
UMGCD9
.-42L-
: M series) Remarks
Parameter No Parameter (UPPer : T series' Lower
macro'
Set uP fo l0 G codes calling custom
U},IGCDO: G code calling custom macro bodY 090 10
UMGCDI: G code calling custom macro bodY 0901r
UMGCD2: G code calling custom uacro bodY 090r2
UMGCD3: G code calling custom macro bodY 090r3
UMGCD : G code calling custom macro bodY 090I4
UMGCD5: G code calling custom macro bodY 090I5
UI"IGCD6: G code calling custom macro bodY 0901 6
UMGCDT: G code calling custom macro bodY 090i7
UMGCD8: G code calling custom macro bodY 090r8
U]'IGCD9: G code calling custom macro bodY 090r9
0 2 3 0
I
l
I
0 2 3 9
UM{CD5:
UWCD6: M code calling custom macro bodY 09022
UMMCDT: M code calling custom macro bodY 09023
UMMCD8: 1"1 code calling custom macro bodY 09024
iD,IMCDg: M code calling custom macro bodY 090 2s
UMMCDlO: M code calling custom macro bodY 09026
UMMCDIl: !1 code calling custom macro bodY 09027
UI'IMCD 12 : M code calling custom macro bodY 09028
UMMCDI3: U cbde calling custom macro bodY 09029
-422-
't.
UMMCDl
0 2 4 0
UMMCDl
UMMCD2
0 2 4 I
UMI'TCD2
UMMCD3
0 2 4 2
UMMCD3
WAITM
0 2 4 3
I.IAITM: Setting of the mlnimum value of 3-diglt code which only OTT
becomes a waiting M code (only OTT):
Input the 3rd figure as a setting value.
Up to 100 waiting M codes are available.
-423-
ifJ+*F.+i-a4 i-{F
BRATE2
0 L 5 0
BRATEz .-
t 50
2 r00
3 110
4 150
5 200
6 300
7 600
8.
0 2 5 POFF
TPSUP
-424-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 2 5 5
BKL9
0 2 5 6
MCODE
rNPx Standard
0 5 0 0 setting
INPX 20 (netric
outPut)
12 (lnch
outPut)
INFZ
0 5 0 I
INPY
INP3
0 5 0 2
;
INPZ
-425-
G
0 5 0 3
INP4
In-position width
In position check is performed when the feed mode
changes from rapid traverse to rapid traverse,
rapid traverse to cutting feed , or cutting feed to
rapid traverse.
SERRX
0 5 0 4
SERRX
SERRZ
0 5 0 5
SERRY
SERR3
0 5 0 6
SERRZ
ril
-426-
{
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 5 0 7
r SERR4
GRDSX
0 5 0 8
GRDSX
GRDSZ
0 5 0 9
GRDSY .!
GRDS3
U 5 I n
GRDSZ
0 5 I I
GRDS4
-427-
<;;llP
i (Set Darameter
V \r tr
t
pL No.0534)
*DCX \ 'IDCX ON
o (Grid shift amount set bY
parameter No. 0508 - 05f I
criollllllllllt
(One.rotation signal) PX
(X axis plus return direction.)
'ii
-428- {_
.i
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower : M series )
PSANGN
I
0 I 6
PSANGN
LPGIN
0 5 I a
LPGIN
RPDFX
0 ) 1 8
RPDFX
RPDFZ
0 5 I r.l
RPDFY
-429-
; ,{aE}F.
RPDF3
0 5 0
RPDFZ
1
0 5 2
RPDF4
LINTX
0 I 2
'F
LINTX
LINTZ
0 5 2
LINTY
LINT3
0 5 L 4
LINTZ
-430-
Parameter No. Par'ameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 5 2 5
LINT4
THRDT
0 5 2
FEDIO(
a
0 5 7
FED}fl(
THDFL
0 5 2 8
-43r-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
FFFDT
0 5 9
FEEDT
FEDFL
0 5 3 0
FEDFL
CYCR
=:=
0 to 3/767 unit: 0.0001 inch
trf,iii.-i;p'u11
Noce) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the
same.
SPLMT
.,
0 5 3
CYCD
-432-
Parameter No. Paraureter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries) Rernarks
RPDFL
0 5 3 3
RPDFL
ZRNFL
0 5 J 4
I
ZRNFL
BKLX
0 5 3 5
BKLX
BKLZ
0 5 J 6
BKLY
-433-
n+rq'
'ffi*ffftf*
Et,
BKL3
1
0 5 5
BKLZ
0 5 J 8
BKL4
i; l0v
Voltage (NC) corresponding
to the upper limit of the I GR2O
spindle motor rPm | (GR2q
Spindle rotation
command
lBf (S code input)
,x vmin V*""
*?ffi Vmux
A 76t5 B c *?0ff
Designation included in parentheses
is concerned with the 3-stage gear.
-434-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T seri-es, Lower : M series) Remarks
J TU L\,
0 5 3 9
GRHYJ,\
i
I
--'{'+Tc e{4ilEF:
cRI'!(l
0 5 q 0
GRHMIN
GRI'fl(2
0 5 I
GRLMAX
GR}D{3
0 5 2
SPDMAX
GR}D(4
0 5 4 J
SPDMIN
ae
-436-
.{
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Rem:aft5
ii
I
1
DRFT3
0 5 4 6
JOGFL
0 5 (+ 8
JOGFL
0 5 4 9
FINT
SEQINC
0 0
SEQINC
-437-
,*rf,l|;F* *
LOI^lSP
t
0 5 5 I
BRATEO
BRATEO
I 50
2 100
3 110
4 150
5 200
6 300
7 600
B 1 200
9 2400
4800-
96 00
-438-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
BMTEl
BMTEl
0 5 5 5
GRTMAX
SCLMP
0 5 6
GRTMIN
-439-
n F,
CRCDL
0 5 5 7
CRCDL
z (AY)
ACALFL
0 5 5 8
-440-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lotrer : M series) Remarks
RPDJX
0 5 5 9
RPDJX
RPDJZ
0 5 o 0
RPDJY
RPDJ3
0 5 6 1
RPDJZ
0 o 2
RPDJ4
0 5 6
JOGF
-44r-
i6;aar*ii,'. - .....*"crl|ff;F
4 o o o o 27 1.1 68 2.7
5 o o o o 37 1.5 9s 3.7
E o o o o @ 8.0 490
(Note) O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact
is open, and Ehe blank shows that it is closed.
-442-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries) Remarks
0 5 6 5
JOGFAD
2 o o o o L4
3 o o o o 20
4 o o o ro 27
5 o o o o 37
6 o o o o 52
7 o o o o 72
8 o o o o r00
9 o o o o 140
tr o o o o @
ll o o o ?7i
L2 o o o o 370
l3 o o o o 520
l4 o o o o 720
l5 o o o o r000
-443-
Parameter No Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 5 6 7
FEDMAD
0 5 o 8
RPDFLAD
0 6 o
ZRNFLAD
0 5 7
SPDLC
-444-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
SLPG},I1
0 5 8 0
AOVLE
SLPGM2
0 5 I I
AOVLS
SLPGI'13
I
0 5 R 2
SLPGM4
0 5 8 3
F1DMAXl
SLPGIN
0 5 8 4
F1DMAX2
-445-
!G
SRPDFL
0 5 8 )
SPDI"DI
-446-
t.''-_
_i
ii Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series ' : M serles) Remarks 5.
ll
tt
It
I
I
SZRNFL
i
0 5 8 6
-t- SPD}O(H
1
SZRNFL: FL speed at spindle orientation
Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deglmin
-
I
t
i
G',1'
MSINDX
n 8 9
I'
#
MSDEG
0 5 9 0
*l
t.i
fG -447-
# itffie:'
PDWEL
0 5 9 I
PECKC
0 5 9 2
STPEX
n 5 9 J
STPEX
STPEZ
0 5 9
STPEY
0 5 9 5
STPE4
0 5 9 6
STPE4
h'
&
-448-
t
;
:
t-
I
I
I
I
-t.
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
J PCHK
0 5 9 8
0 5 9 9
TLCNEC
PARTRQ
0 o 0 0
PARTRQ
I
PEXPJX
I
0 6 0 l-
PEXPJX
PEXPJZ
0 o n 2
PEXPJY
PEXPJ3
n 6 0 J
PEXPJZ
-449-
I;rF
PEXPJ4
0 6 0 4
PEXPJ4
PFLJGX
0 o 0 5
PFLJGX
PFLJGZ
0 6 0 6
PFLJGY
PFLJG3
0 6 0
PFLJGZ
PFLJG4
0 6 0 8
PFLJG4
INPDX
0 6 q
INPDX
INPDZ
0 o I 0
INPDY
-4so-
ParameEer No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Rem:rks
INPD3
0 6 I I
INPDZ
INPD4
0 6 I 2
INPD4
ttPoFFtt means
0 6 I 3 POFF that power
TPFDT should be
turned off
whenever the
TPFDT: Time constants of spindle and Z-axis aeceleration/ parameter is
decelerati-on in Ehe tapping in the rigid mode changed.
(Exponential/linear type is selected by TPSUP.)
The threading accuracy is affeeted when the time
constant is either too long or too short. '
Data type: Word type
Setvalue: 0-4000
UniE : msec
Standard setting: 200 - 150
0 I 4 POFF
TPFFL
-45r-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
ttPOFF" means
0 o 1
L o POFF
LPGM9
-452-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M serie s )
ttPoFFtt means
0 6 I POFF that po\ter
TPS}'( should be
turned off
whenever the
TPSMX: Maximum allowable speed of the spindle in the rigid parameter is
tapping. changed.
Data type: Word type
Set value: spindle: position coder gear ratio
1: t 0 - 7400
l:2 0- 9999
1:4 0- 9999
,\"
t..
1:8 0- 9999
Unit : PRM
Standard setting: 3600
1r'
0 6 I 8
TPIPZ
-453-
G.*96
4{
,fi
t
I
*
0 6 I 9 .x
I
INP9 I
I
t
$
INP9: Spindle in-position width in the rigid tapping :
accuracy is affected.
Data type: I^lord type
SeEvalue: 0-32767 t
:I
Unit : DeEection unit
Standard setting: 20 :
*
0 2 0
TPERZ
-4s4-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 6 2 I
TPER9
t
0 o 2 2
TPESZ
ril
if;
.ll
.t
jl
il
'l
I
-45s- I
FF?9.8!{4S':.
: T series, Lower :
q
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper M series) Remarks
0 6 2 3
TPES9
ttPoFFtt means
0 6 L 4 POFF that power
LGM9M should be
turned off
-whenever the
LGM9M: Spindle loop gain rnultiplier in the rigid rnode parameter is
tapping for rniddle gear. (Set when one or more changed.
gears are used).
Data type: Word type
setvalufi l-32767
Calculation = 2048 x E/L x G x 1000
E = Speed command voltage at 1000 rpra
L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle
motor rotation
G = Detection unit
Calculation example:
trrlhen the configuration is as shown
in the left drawi-ng:
E = 1.667 [V]
SPINDLE (motor of 6000 rpm ar 10 [v])
MOTOR L = 720"
(Spindle makes two rotaEions
when spindle motor rotates
one turn. )
G= La/ 4096
720" 14096 = 0.17578"
T^
Ld- - 7 2A"
(Spindle must make two
rotations=360"x2for
rotating the position coder
one turn. )
4096 = Detection pulse per position
coder rotation
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 * *
1.667 |TZO x 0. 17578 * 1000 = 833
-456-
-t
i
D
*
J
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
J ttPoFFtt means
i
0 o 2 5 POFF that power
LGM9H should be
turned off
Spindle loop gain nultiplier for high speed gear in whenever the
the rigid tapping. (Used for 3-srage gear).- parameter is
Data type : Word type ctianged.
Setring value: I to 32767
(Note) Refer to parameter No . 0624 for calculation
formula.
0 6 L 7
ERR9
0 6 z 8
t
IPL9
-457-
a=,$*8*.
i'+'
il
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
LTIXl
0 7 0 0
LTlXI
1
,.
I
LTTZI ;
0 0 I i
1
)
LTiYI I
.t
.,
0 0
LTIZl
0 7 0 J
a LTI41
LTlX2
0 0 4
LT 1X2
LTIZ2
0 7 0
LTlY2
0 7 0 6
LTLZ2
0 7 0 I
LTI42
-4s8-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
Lrlnll t
I
Axis name
-459-
d
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorver : M series)
I
f
'+
Remarks
T
{
PRSX
0 7 0 c
PRSX
PRSZ
'1
0 0 9
PRSY
PRS3
0 7 I 0
PRSZ
0 1 I
AC PRS4
sfs
-460-
Pararneter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lourer : M series) Remarks
SPTIME
0 1
I 2
PECINTX
PSGRDX
U t 3
PECINTY
PSGRDZ
n - I 4
PECINTZ
1
0 I 5
PECINT4
-461-
F.
rr
I
t
t
rt
[,
I
MRCCD
I 1
U 7
MRCDT
0 7 t 6
PESCX
q
0 1
PESCZ
0 2 0
'462-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
PATIM
0 7 2 I
GROVE
0 7 2 2
THRPT
0 2 3
t
THANG
0 7 2 4
-453-
F.
f.r
ti
THCLM
0 2 5
THDFN
0 7 2 6
WIMAX
0 l 2 8
-464-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
WOMAX
0 7 L o
I,IIRSS
0 7 3 0
PROTAG
CANMAX
1
0 3 I
PSCRT
GANMAZ
0 3 2
-465-
Parameter No. Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
EPCX
0 7 J 3
EPCZ
0 7 3 4
q
REF2X
0 3 5
REF2X
REF2Z
0 l 3 o
REF2Y
-465-
GF
0 1 3 T
REF2Z
0 7 3 8
REF24
ABSXP
0 7 9
ABSXP
ABSZP
0 4 0
ABSYP
l
F,
0 7 4 I
ABSZP
0 7 4 2
ABS4P
-467-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
TLSXP
n 7 3
LT2X1
TLSXY
0 7 4 4
LT2YI
TLSZP
0 7 {+ 5
LT2ZI
TLSZM
0 7 q 6
LT24I
LT2Xl
0 7
LT2X2
LT2ZI
0 1 d
LT2Y2
-
0 7 9
LT2Z2
0 1 5 0
LT242
LT2X2
0 l 5 I
EXOFS I
-468-
1
;l
LT222
a
0 5
EXOFS2
LT2 FF
T ' Apex No. of square area
Represents the axis
Set the stroke limit represented above.
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 urn
(l"letric output)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unir 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Set the stroke lirnit by the distance from the
reference point. For the designation of dianeter,
set X-axis sith the diameter.designated value. Use
parameter INOUT (No. 24) to set the forbidden area
to the inside or outside.
Note) Unit becoines l/t0 in increment system l/10.
TLSXP X axis * distance to contaet surface (Xp)
TLS)O{ X axis - distance to contact surface (Xm)
X axis surface
Z axis ,J
-469-
T
IT
,
,?
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks f
j
LT2XI- Check stroke lirnit using these parameters, not
.,t
LT242: parameter Nos. 0700 to 0707 when EXLM2 (G129.6)
;
(M series) signal is ON.
0 1 5 J
EXOFS3
0 7 5 4
EXOFS4
0 - 5 5
ZOFlSl
PECINTX
U 7 5 6
ZOFlS2
PECINTZ
0 7
ZOF 1 S3
-470-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series' Lovter : M series)
PECINT3
0 7 5 8
zoFls4
PECINT4
0 7 5 9
ZOF2S I
0 o 0
zoE2s2
0 7 o t
zoF2s3
0 6 z
zoF2s4
-47r-
3
d
Q
.
PECINTX, Compensation intervals at pitch error compensation
PECINTZ, of each axis. *
PECINT3, Setting value: ...tr
I
PECINT4: hrlren the radius is designated
8000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut)
4000 - 99999999 (Inch outPut)
Ilowever' set in diameter value for the diameter
designated axis.
hhen the diameter is designated
I6000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut)
8000 - 99999999 (Inch orrtPut)
ZOF2S I 2nd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis'
-4 Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(css )
Setting value 0 to +99999999 unir 0.001 rmr
(Metric output)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Nornally, data are inputted from the work coordinate
system setting screen.
Note) Unit becornes l/10 in increment system 1/10.
0 l 6 3
z0F3s I
0 4
ZOF3S2
0 b 5
ZOF3S3
0 o 6
ZOF3S4
-472-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 - o 7
zoF4s t
IDSTX
0 6 8
zoE4s2
IDSTZ
0 7 6 9
zoF4s3
0 7 0
ZOF4S4
-473-
's
-j
q
t
0 7 I
ZOF5S 1
0
ZOF5S2
0 l 7 J
zoF5s3
n a a
4
ZOF5S4
I
0 7 5
ZOF6S I
0 7 1 6
ZOE632
- 474 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
0
zoF6s3
0 7 8
ZOF6S4
PARTAL
a
PARTAI
REF3X
0 7 8 0
REF3X
-475-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
REF3Z
0 B I
REF3Y
REF33
0 7 d 2
I(-L.r JZ
REF34
0 1 8 3
REF34
REF4X
0 7 8 4
REF4X
REF4Z
0 7 tJ 5
REF4Y
REF43
n 7 8 o
REF4Z
- 476 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series ) Remarks
REF44
1
0 8 7
REF44
0 7 8 8
FIDFl
0 1 8 9
F IDF2
I
0 9 0
FlDF3
0 9 I
F IDF4
-,
0 9 2
IH
F 1DF5
|[
iii
il
ii
tl
rl
-477- ll
- Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 7 9 J
F IDF6
0 o
FIDFT
0 l 9
F IDFS
0 9 6
? FIDF9
0 7 9 9
A3S9
- 478 -
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries) Remarks
PECORGX
I
I 0 0 0
PECORGX
I
0 0
1 I
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for
Z axLs.
Setting range 0 to +7
I I 2 8
PECORGZ
2 0 0 n
PECORGY
2 0 0 I
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for
Y axis (for M series), Z axis (for T series).
to Setting range 0 to +7
2 I 2 8
PECORG3
3 0 0 0
'
PECORGZ
-479-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper i T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
0 0
.)
Setting of picch error compensation amount for
Z axis (for M series), 3rd axis (for T series).
to Setting range 0 to +7
I 8
3
PECORG4
4 0 0 0
PECORG4
1
4 0 0 I
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for
to 4th axis.
Setting range 0 to +7
q I 8
PECORG5
5 0 0 0
PECORG5
5 0 n I
< t+' axis pitch error offset setting
t Set ting range 0 to +7
5 I 8
PECORG6
6 0 0 0.
PECORG6
-480-
Parameter No. Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
6 0 0 1
DECIS SCWS
7 0 0 I
DECIS SCI^IS
PPDS
7 0 0 2
PPDS
ZYL6 zt't5
7 0 0 J
ZIT6 ZYL1
Ii
I -48r-
t" .ry'
D!{R5 GRD5
'l
0 0
DMR5 GRD6
D}G.6 GRD6
0 0
DMR6 GRD6
APRSS OFFVYS
l 0 t 0
APRSS )FFVYS
g
BiI NO
t'
:
:
: -482-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : series)
ABS6 A3S5
0 2 2
ABS6 ABS5 ii:
Bir No.
Bit No.
CMR5
I 0 0
CMR5
CMR6
7 1 0 t
CMR6
DSPSUB I
7 t 3 0
DSPSUB I
-483-
F- ilt? #'
DSPSUB2
t J t
DSPSUB2
INP5
5 0
INP5
u rNp6
7 5 0 I
INP6
In-position width for 5th/6th axes in the order of INP5 and INP6.
SERR5
1 0
5LKK]
SERR6
5 0 5
SERR6
GRDS5
7 5 0 8
GRDS5
-484-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) Remarks
GRDS6
7 5 0 9
GRDS6
Grid shift amount for 5th/6th axes in the order of GRDS5 and
GRDS6.
LPGINS
5 7
LPGINS
RPDF5
7 5 I 8
RPDF5
RPDF6
1
5 t 9
RPDF6 .
5th/6th axis rapid traverse rate in the order of RpDF5 and RpDF6.
LINT5
a
5 a 2
LINT5
LINT6
7 5 2 3
LINT6
!
1
;
i
I
I
I
I -485-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : l'1 series) Remarks
FEEDTS
7 2 9
FEEDTS
FEDFLS
7 5 0
FEDFLS
ZRNFLS
5 3 4
ZRNFLS
BKL5
1 5 3 5
BKL5
DT\LO
7 5 3 6
t-*
Backlash amounc for 5th/6th axes in the order of BKL5 and BKL6.
STPE5
7 5 9 3
STPE5
-486-
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorrer : M series) . Remarks
STPE6
5 9 4
STPE6
Linit value of positional deviatlon for 5th and 6th axes at stop
in the order of STPE5 and STPE6.
PSANGNS
5 I 6
PSANGNS
SPDLCS
1
5 3 9
SPDLCS
LTI5 I
7 0 0
LTI5 I
LTI6l
1
0 I
LTI6I
LT152
7 1 0 4
LT152
-487-
1q*[ *!flprr{pee
!
I
.i _"-
LTI62
7 7 0 5
LTI62
PRS5
1 7 0 8
PRS5
PRS6
0 q
1
PRS6
PRS5, PRSS ?
Coordinate value of 5th and 6th axes reference point.
8 5 0 0
6 5 6 5
B o 0 0
I 6 6
i
I
-488-
Ttre parameters of each axis for the digital servo are
following:
sBoo DGPRM
BirNo. 7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0
Bit No.
-489-
_r'
,'d
AMRO - AMR5
&
Motor type
No. of pulses/pulse
coder rotation(p/r)
AMR
5 q 3 2 I 0
20,20M,30,30R
2500 0 I I 0 I 0
3000 0 1
I 0 0 0 I
5-0 1000 0 t 0 0 0 0
25000 I
t f 0 I 0
8E oz
Btr No. 7 6s t
Since the set value has been fixed as in the following, never change lt. The
setting value of the PSSEL is 1, While that of the VFSEL is
Parameter No. Data.
8Bo3
Bit No.
sEo4
Bit No.
-490-
Parameter No. Data
Parameter input
Data type : Word axls type i
)
Data unit :
Data range: L to 32767 1
I
:
The standard values of the parameters related to the Digital Servo are stored
in the menory of the NC corresponding to each motor type. Set them for each
axis.
When this parameter is 0 or less or an unavailable value is set, an-alarn
results.
Motor type
Parameter No.
5-0 4-0 3-0 2-O t-0
sIz o 3 4 5 6 7
Motor type
Parameter No.
0 5 t0 20M 20
eflz o 8 9 i0 11 L2
Motor type I
Parameter No.
30 30R
aIz o 13 L4
Parameter input
Data type : I^Iord axis type
Data unit :
Data range: L to 32767
When Digital Servo is to be used, calculate the inertia ratio of the load
inertia and motor rotor inertia according to the following expression and set
lt for each axis.
Load inertla ratio = load ir-rerti+ x 256
Rotor lnertra
I
l
:
-491-
\'- I
Paraueter No. Data
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Set the rotating direction of a motor.
llI: The motor rotares in the positive direction (Viewed from the motor
shaft side, it rotates in the CCW direction.)
-111: The motor rotates in the negative direction (Viewed from the motor
shaft side, it rotates in the CW direction.
If a value exceDt the aobve has been set, an alarm results.
Parameter No. Data
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Data unit : PULSE/REV
Dara range: I to 32167
When Digical Servo is to be used, set the number of pulses per rotation of
the motor of the detector to be used for the velocity feedback. Perform
calculaEion supposing-ttrat there are four pulses per pulse cycle phases A and
B.
However, when a pulse coder of 0.lu is to be used, set l/10 data.
If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
Parameter No. Data
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Data unit : PULSE/REV
Data range: I to 32767
When Digital Servo is to be usedr st the number of pulses per one rotation
of t.he motor of the detecEor to be used for the position feedback. Perform
calculation supposing that there are hour pulses per pulse cycle of phases A
and B. (Exarnple, 2,000 x 4 = 8,000 for a pulse coder of 2,000 p/r.)
However,whenapulsecoderof0.liristobeused,Set1/l0data
If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
-492-
Parameter No. Data
8E 40 Parameters related to Digital Servo
a $50 s
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Data unit :
Data range:
Parameters related to Digital Servo
Note) I{hen parameter No. 8 * 0O bit I (DGPRM) is set to 0 and rhe moror type
is set to parameter No. 8 * 20, the standard value is autonatically
set. Norma11y, it is not necessry to change this parameter.
Parameters which can be determined by the motor to be applied.
(Data type: Word axis rye) (l)
a fls r 2T 2L 2L 2I 2T 2l
s[s + 3787 3787 3787 3787 3787 3787
a ps e 0 0 0 0 0 0
-493-
Falxlrr: -'r{.i6*r.tdffir"
e[s a 57 (7 57 57 57
e[s e 0 0 0 U 0 0
a[+ s 0 0 0 0 0 0
I aIs z 0 0 U 0 0 0
-494-
{
I
I
i
{
j
AC servo aot.or t,o be applied
Parameter No i
5 10 201.1 20 30 30R
l
I1
a[s r 2l 2L 2L 2I 2L 2L i
t
a[s + 3787 3787 3787 3787 3781 3787 t
t
aIs o 0 0 0 0 0 0
aIs e 57 57 57 57 57 57
aIs s 0 0 0 0 0 0
Co'nnon parameters for each motor model (Data type: bit axls type)
DaEa
Parameter No.
It7 It6 tt\ #4 #3 ll2 tfL ll0
aPo: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I
sSo a 0 0 0 I I 0 I 0
-495-
APPENDIX 8 CODES USED IN PROGRAM
')
-496-
<-4rn
3a&a
sign rt-tt i-nput error (sign tt-tt was i-nput af Eer an address
with which i.t cannot be used. Or two or more,r_r,
were input. ) "1rrr"--
Decinal point tt.,t input error (A decinal point was.
after an address with which it ean not be used. Orinput
two
decimal points were input.)
Unusable character was input in significant area.
An unusable G code was
!
i,
037 G40 (offset cancel) is commanded at the plane other than M only
offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected
by using GI7, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensati-on
C mode.
-498-
Number ConEents Remarks
040 overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation T only
in a canned cycle G90 or G94.
041 Overcutting vill occur in cutter compensation C. M only
Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation. T only
o44 One of G27 t.o G30 is conmanded i"n canned cycle mode. 'M only
046 Other than P2, P3 and P4 are comnanded for 2nd, 3rd and
4th reference point return command.
050 The chanfering or a corner R was specified in a block T only
which includes a thread cutting command.
051 The block after a block containing a chamfering or a T only
corner R specification e/as not a GOl cornmand.
052 The nove direction or the move amount in a block T only
following chaufering or a corner R command was not
adequate.
055 The uove distance in the block which includes the T only
chamfering or the corner R specification is sualler than
the chamfering aaount or the corner R.
0s6 Both end point and angle are not designated in the next T only
block comrnand of the angle designation block (A ).
I (K) is commanded to X-axis (Z-axis) in chamferin=g
command.
i
0s8 Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing T only
'--i progranning.
i 059 The program wlth the selected number cannot be searched,
1n external program number search.
-499-
nGY
(r
065 o G00 or GOl is not at the block with the
commanded T only :ia
sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, 1;
-500-
Number Contents Remarks
I
078 A prograu number or a sequence number which was
specified by address P in the block which includes an t
M98, M99 or G56 was not found. I
I
i
079 The contents of the program stored in the memory did not
agree r^'ith that in tape in collation.
t
083 In automatic tool compensation, an invalid axis was T only i
specified or the command is incremental. (Automatic
tool compensation function) I
*t -501-
ffi
Number
097
Contents
M only
t:
94 to 97 reset, no autonatic operation is performed.)
098 A command of the program re-start was specified without M only
the reference point return operation after power 0N and
emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.
ti6 The variable number designated with P is forbidden for For custom
assignment. macro A
-502-
Number Contents Rem:rks
143 The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and M only
circular radius exceed the maximum conmand value.
144 The coordinate rotatlon plane and arc or tool offset C M only
plane differ from each other.
148 AutomatLc override deceleration is out of the settable M only
range of judgernent angle. Check parameter No. O2l3'
02L4,02I5.
-503-
*{H*.
s
*
Number Contents Remarks
r50 Tool Group No. exceeds the maxi-mum a11owable va1ue. M only
151 The tool group commanded in the rnachining program i-s not M only
set.
t52 The number of tools within one group exceeds the maxi-mum M only
value registerable.
153 The program setting the tool group is not entered in a M only
block to store T code.
t <,/, When the group is not commanded, H99 or D99 was M only
commanded.
i55 In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same M only
block do not correspond to the group in use.
156 P and L commands are missing at the head of program in M only
which the tool group is set.
r57 The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxinum M only
a1lowab1e va1ue.
-504-
2) Alarms on the absolute pulse coder (APC)
326 Y-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a lott APC alarm
level so that the date cannot be held.
-505-
{
327 Y-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the APC alarm
batterv must be renewed.
328 Y-axis APC battery volcage has reached a level APC alarm
where the batterv must be renewed (including when
porder is OFF) .
JJO Z-axis APC bfttery voltage has decreased to a Iow APC alarm
level so that the date eannot be held.
337 | Z-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the APC alarm
I baccerv must be renewed.
338 Z-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level APC alarm
wherejthe battery must be renev/ed (including when
power is OFF).
346 4th-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low APC alarm
level so that the data cannot be held.
-506-
I
#
347 4th-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the APC a1-arm
battery must be renewed.
348 4th-axis APC batLery voltage has reached a leve1 APC alarm
where the battery must be renewed.
(including when por^rer is OFF.)
3) Servo alarms
Number Contents Remarks
-507-
F*. ""i-w
,::
'i
.!
3) An inproper data such as 0 or less has b..n set to
parameter 8123 for the number of velocity feedback i
i
pulses per rotation of. the motor a
{
4) An improper data such as 0 or less has been set to ^
4,
parameter 8124 for Ehe number of positi-on feedback
pulses pef rotation of motor. g,
-508-
Number Contents Remarks
Lal
When-the Y-axis (01,I) or Z axis (0T) encers any of the
conditions shorsn in the following, this alarm results.
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been
' set to the parameter 8220 for motor type.
2) A proper value (lI1 or -fll) has not been ser ro the
parameter 8222 for the rotating direction of the
moE.or.
-509-
roFF
437 When the Z (0M) or the third (OT) axis becomes any of the
conditi-ons shown in the following, this alarm results.
-510-
Number Content s Remarks
447 When the fourth axis enters any of the conditions shown
in the following, this alarm results
1) A value whieh is out of the specified range has been
set to the parameter 8420 for motor type.
2) A proper value (1ll or -tll) has not been ser ro the
parameter 8422 for the rotating direction of the
motor
- 5lr -
:,#
r!
t
5) Alarm in FANUC PMC MODEL I,/M
5) Overheat alarm
Number Contents Remarks
-5L2-
Number Content s Remarks
't?2 BP/S alarm ls produced with the same nunber as P/S alarur
taking place in normal program editing. (070, 071, 072,
073, 074, etc.)
t
The details of Digital Serv.o system alarm No. 4t 4 are indicated at the
diagnosis numbers 72O,721,722, and 723 in order for the X, Y(Z), Z(C and
PMC) , and the fourth (Y and PMC) axis.
DGNOS No.
-513-
i:{r;:=lifi {q*e**itidbeil *a*f rL*sra
{
t
Mode Func ! i on
Key SETTING
Class i f ica- swi rch Operation
Func t i on switch PI,JE=l but ton
t ion button
Power 0N and
Clear Mernory all o
clear
Power ON
I DFeFT I
Cleari.ng o
Parameter
Clearing o Power ON
s to red
Program
I Tf,lDIIT I
Parameter o ED IT PARA}I
Data InPut
from TaPe (Tape MemorY)
OFSET
Offset value + of fser 11e. * FfrFffl
+ Offset data +
MDI PARAU
Setting data +0- + Data
I ETADT I
Parameter EDIT PARAM
Tape Punch
-5r4-
Mode
Classif ica- Key SETTING Func t ion
Func t lon switch switch 0pera t ion
t ion PI.JE = I but ton
but ton
Prograo Deletion of a o ED1T .
PRGRM I U I r rrogram No. +l ur,Lt r I
Deletion of
a block
o EDIT PRGRM f-mfr-l ' l-5ErET-l
I
t
I
-515-
---l
/..r*#*.;". " ;.d!e*l, -r1*q
.g
.l
fi 4 axes
-516-
#
PMC is required
Ref,erence
Name Specification itern
-517-
ffi
*iil
S ervo-of f Provided o
-518-
*3*
?-
Self-diagnosis Provided
function
Emergency stop Provided III-7 . I
St.atus output. CNC ready signal, servo ready
signal, alarm signal' distri-
bution end signal, automatic
operating signal, automatic
operation starting signal,feed
hold larnp signalr power supply
ready signal and resetting
signal
Battery alaru signal o
I
,l
rl
-519-
F
* Provided o ITT_2
Software oPeratorr s
panel
o
Software oPeratorr s * Provided
panel general Purpose
o LLL-L.L
Machine oPeratorr s * Provided
panel
, PMC is required
. Position Detector
Reference
Name Specification itern
PMC required
Speci fi cation
* 3000 stePs
* 3000 steps
* 5ooo steps
* 8000 steps
* 12000 steps
No. of DI/DO
*
*
-520-
. Program Inpu o:t PMC is required
Reference
Name Speci f icat ion item
I
Ff0/ffl tape format * Provided II-18
i
'l - .521 -
;|
- I
o:t PMC is required
Reference
Name Soecification item
. Auxiliary
r rt- lunction o;, PMC is required
Reference
Name Specification item
-522-
. Tool Function t s requ
Reference
Name Specification item
Tool function T2 II-10
T4 o
, Edit/Operation
Edi lo o;, PMC is required
Reference
Name Specification item
Part program storage 10n rrr-9. l8
length *.20 n
*40u
*80rn
rt 120 n
*320n
No. of programs * 63 programs rrr-9. l7
registered * 125 programs
g 200 programs
Program name display Provided rrr-1 I . 2
Sequence No. search Provided III-9.9
Program No. search Provided III-9.4
Optional block skip I block rr-13 .4.4
9 blocks o rr-I3.4.4
Sequence No. * Provided
comparison and stop
-523-
o: PMC is required
Name Speci fication Reference
item
External work No. Provided (15)
search
. Dlspl.a
Di , PMC 1S req u ired
. External Data
Dat rnput/uutpu
/o,t o:, PMC is required
Name Specification Reference
item
External key i,nput *'Provided o
-524-
is required
Name Sp ecifi cation Reference
item
High-speed remote * Provided
buffer B
-525-
&:
a'
{
n1
l
,.t
-l
II
I
i)
i
I
uJl
sl
(Y) l
o
Ig
Jl
<l
It fl
o
zl
<l
(l,
-t I cc EI I
chl
o E.
u,
(D
o
6
cc
uJ
G
o
co
=
o I
irA
o 2o>
o
F. o
F
po (J
o!
!o
l+' o6
CD
lrt 6-
ko
:!
i,
I
t'
i_
1
=qlltrF-:#.;.' ""*r{fff
I
'ir
S.t
lf,'-c-:.,{41
:
'i:, \*'
^.\
\\.
\rI\
i.
ut
\
't
i
. l/o fart af this mnnunl may be *
'a
notice.
.*
;:i
-\l-./t#
ll#+-;r-ieK;ll.*,
\
'.
'.:,.
.,
G
'tt